Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe

215x100 mm einfügen
Stern und MB-Schrift nur optional verwenden

COMAND

COMAND Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual
Order-No. 6515 6827 13 Part-No. 164 584 09 87 US Edition B 2009
Welcome to COMAND! We continuously strive to improve our pro-
Please make yourself familiar with your duct and ask for your understanding that
COMAND control unit and read the instruc- we reserve the right to make changes in
tions in this manual before operating the design and equipment. Therefore, informa-
COMAND system. This will help you derive tion, illustrations and descriptions in this
a greater benefit from the system. Please manual might differ from the equipment in-
also follow the instructions and warnings stalled in your vehicle. As such, the infor-
contained in this manual. Ignoring them mation, illustrations and descriptions
could result in damage to the vehicle or contained in this manual may not be rea-
personal injury to you or others. sonably relied upon in making any claims
with respect to the actual performance of
Depending on model, version and configu- the product.
ration, your COMAND system equipment
may differ. Therefore, you may find expla- These operating instructions form an inte-
nations for optional equipment not instal- gral part of the vehicle and should therefo-
led in your vehicle. If you have any re always be kept inside the vehicle and
questions about the operation of any passed on to the new owner if the vehicle
equipment, your authorized Mercedes- is sold.
Benz Center will be glad to demonstrate We extend our best wishes for many miles
the proper procedures. of safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
 Content Content

i Please also refer to the index (컄 page 263). Setting the Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
Selecting Sound Settings . . . . . . . . 32 Switching to Navigation Mode . . . . 53
Surround Sound . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Basic Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Destination Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Where to find it . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 Introduction to Destination Input . . 62
Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Entering a Destination via the Address
Operating safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 62
Declaration of conformity regarding Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Entering a Destination from the
the distribution of telecommunica- Opening System Menu . . . . . . . . . . 36 Destination Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
tions equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Menu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Entering Destination from the last
Intended purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Switching the Display On/Off. . . . . 37 Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Function restrictions when driving the Time Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 Entering Destination via the Map . . 73
vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 Setting the System Language. . . . . 38 Entering Stopover Destination . . . . 74
Display Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 POI Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Read-out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Entering a POI in local Area of
At a glance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Voice Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . 39 Destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
COMAND Control System . . . . . . . . . . 16
Bluetooth® Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Entering a POI in the Vicinity of the
Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Function Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Rear View Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Entering a POI in the Vicinity of a
COMAND Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Multifunction Steering Wheel. . . . . . . . 21 Specific Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Operating COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 Entering a POI via a Name Search . 77
Opening Menu for a Main Function 26 Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Entering a POI via a Phone Number
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Search. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Selecting Menu Item. . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Choosing a POI Category . . . . . . . . 78
Character Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 Entering a POI via the Map . . . . . . . 83
Operating Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Updating the Map Software . . . . . . 47 Route Guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Basic Functions of COMAND . . . . . . . . 31
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Switching COMAND On/Off . . . . . . 31
Input Restriction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51 Driving Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Mute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Content

Example Display without Driving Saving Crosshairs Position in the Last Creating a New Entry . . . . . . . . . . 114
Maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Deleting Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Traffic Lane Recommendations . . . 86 Deleting one of the Last Adding Phone Number to a Phone Book
Destination or Destination Region Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
Reached . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Call Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Off-road and Off-map . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Making Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Navigation Announcements . . . . . . 89 Telephone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Incoming Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
Cancelling Route Guidance. . . . . . . 90 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104 Initiating an Outgoing Call. . . . . . . 121
Resuming Route Guidance after General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Functions during a Single Call. . . . 122
Cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Detour Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90 Making Calls via Bluetooth® General Information . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Alternative Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Opening the Address Book . . . . . . 124
Route Browser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91 Interruptions to the Connection While Submenu overview for address
Displaying Destination Information. 91 Driving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Real-Time Traffic Notifications . . . . 92 Operating Options. . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 Selecting Entry in the Address
Read-aloud function . . . . . . . . . . . . 95 Functional Restrictions . . . . . . . . . 105 Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Destination Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Activating the Mobile Phone. . . . . . . . 106 Creating a New Address Book
Home Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96 Mobile Phone with Bluetooth® Inter- Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Saving a Destination in the Destination face . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 Searching for an Address Book
Memory. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 Setting Transmit and Receive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Deleting Destination or Home Address Volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109 Deleting Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
from the Destination Memory. . . . 100 “911” Emergency Call. . . . . . . . . . 110 Displaying Details for an Address
Last Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Submenu Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 Book Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Saving a Destination Permanently in Phone Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Changing Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
the Destination Memory . . . . . . . . 101 COMAND Phone Book . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Initiating a Phone Call to an Entry. 129
Saving Vehicle Location in the Last Opening COMAND Phone Book . . 113 Starting Navigation to an Entry . . . 129
Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 Selecting an Entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Voice Tags. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Initiating Call to an Entry. . . . . . . . 114 Downloading Contacts . . . . . . . . . 130
 Content

Notes on MP3 Mode. . . . . . . . . . . 148 Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 Notes on CD/DVD Discs . . . . . . . 149 Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Notes on the Care of Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Audio Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 CD/DVD Discs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Connecting External Devices . . . . 167
Calling up the Audio Menu . . . . . . 132 Loading CDs and DVDs. . . . . . . . . 150 Switching to Media Interface
Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133 Loading SD Memory Card . . . . . . 152 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Switching to the Radio . . . . . . . . . 133 Ejecting CDs and DVDs . . . . . . . . 152 Selecting Music Files . . . . . . . . . . 169
Submenu Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Ejecting SD Memory Card. . . . . . . 154 Selecting a Category/Playlist/
Switching Wavebands. . . . . . . . . . 135 Submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Tuning to a Station . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Switching to CD Audio, DVD Audio or Playing the Content of a Category or
Storing Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Switching to Weather Band . . . . . 136 Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Alphabetical Track Selection . . . . 171
HD Radio™ Broadcasting . . . . . . . . . . 137 Pause Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Selecting an Active Partition (for USB
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 Media . . 158 Mass Storage Devices Only) . . . . . 172
Switching to HD Radio . . . . . . . . . 138 Selecting Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
HD Radio Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138 Fast Forward/Reverse . . . . . . . . . 159 Audio Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Submenu Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Selecting Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Switching to Audio Aux. . . . . . . . . 173
Switching Wavebands. . . . . . . . . . 140 Gracenote Media Database . . . . . 160
Tuning to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Setting Audio Format . . . . . . . . . . 162
Storing Stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Displaying Program Info . . . . . . . . 140 Music Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 DVD Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Switching to Weather Band . . . . . 140 Switching to Music Register . . . . . 163 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Copying Music Files into the Music Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Important Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Automatic Picture Switch-off . . . . 176
Subscribing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Deleting all Music Files. . . . . . . . . 165 Notes on Storage Media . . . . . . . . 176
Satellite Radio Operation . . . . . . . 143 Requesting Memory Space Notes on the Care of Discs. . . . . . 176
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3 . . . . . 147 Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 DVD Playback Conditions . . . . . . . 177
Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Folder Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Functional Restrictions . . . . . . . . . 177
Content

Loading DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Headset Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Functional Restrictions . . . . . . . . . 204

Ejecting DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 Main Loudspeaker Operation . . . . 196 Loading DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Submenu Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 Setting Treble and Bass . . . . . . . . 196 Ejecting DVDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Switching to DVD Video . . . . . . . . 179 Multiuser Operation . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Switching to DVD Operation . . . . . 204
Displaying/Hiding Control Menu . 179 Functional Restrictions in DVD Video Displaying/Hiding Control Menu . 205
Displaying/Hiding Menu System . 179 Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Displaying/Hiding Menu System . 205
Fast Forward/Reverse . . . . . . . . . 180 System Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Fast Forward/Reverse . . . . . . . . . 205
Selecting DVD Media . . . . . . . . . . 180 Calling up the System Menu . . . . . 198 Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Selecting the Display Language . . 198 Pause Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
Pause Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Switching the Display Design . . . . 198 Selecting a Scene/Chapter . . . . . 206
Selecting a Scene/Chapter . . . . . 181 Adjusting the Brightness. . . . . . . . 198 Selecting a Film/Track . . . . . . . . . 206
Selecting a Film/Track . . . . . . . . . 181 Switching the Display Screen On/Off. Picture Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
Picture Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 198 DVD Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
DVD Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation . . 199 Setting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
Setting Language . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Subtitles and Camera Angle . . . . . 208
Subtitles and Camera Angle . . . . . 184 Notes on CD/DVD Discs . . . . . . . 199 Interactive Content . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Interactive Content . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 Loading a CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Aux Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Video Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 Ejecting a CD/DVD. . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Connecting an Aux Source . . . . . . 209
Switching to Video Aux . . . . . . . . . 185 Switching to CD Audio DVD Audio or Switching to Aux Mode . . . . . . . . . 209
MP3 Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 200 Operation with Active Source from
Selecting Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 COMAND. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Rear Seat Entertainment System . . 187 Fast Forward/Reverse . . . . . . . . . 201 Setting Brightness/Contrast/
Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Selecting Folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Color . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Pause Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202 Changing the Picture Format . . . . 211
Parts of the Rear Seat Entertainment Stop Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Setting Audio Format . . . . . . . . . . 203
Replacing the Batteries. . . . . . . . . 194 Playback Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Basic Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 DVD Video Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
 Content

Phone Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . 241

Voice Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213 Navigation Commands . . . . . . . . . 242 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Address Book Commands . . . . . . 243
Operating Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Audio and Video Commands . . . . 244
Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Symbols only used in this chapter 214 Satellite Radio (SIRIUS) . . . . . . . . 245
Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214 CD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Phone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Hard Disk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Memory Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 DVD Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 AUX. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Entering an Address . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Help function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Tele Aid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Radio and Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . 234 Vehicle Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 The Tele Aid System . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Emergency Calls. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
DVD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Information Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Search & Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
External Equipment (AUX) . . . . . . . . . 239
Audio Aux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 Technical terminology . . . . . . . . . . . 259
General Commands . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Content
 Introduction
Where to find it
Where to find it
This operating guide has been designed to Navigation Video
help you use your COMAND control unit in Here you will find detailed information re- Here you will find all information regarding
all situations. Each chapter has its own col- garding the following topics: the video system.
or code in order to make it easier to find in- 앫 Setting options for the map display and
formation. the route calculation
Since not all models have the same stan- Rear Seat Entertainment (RSE)
앫 Destination input
dard equipment, your COMAND system In this chapter the Rear Set Entertainment
equipment may deviate from some de- 앫 POI input is explained.
scriptions and illustrations. 앫 Route guidance
앫 Destination memory
Voice Control
At a glance
Here you will find information about oper-
Here you will find an overview of the com- Telephone ating several COMAND functions via Voice
ponents of COMAND. Then you will find ex- Control.
amples illustrating how to operate The telephone functions are described
COMAND and information on the basic here. You will also find information on the
functions. If you are operating a COMAND address book.
Tele Aid
for the first time or have rented the vehicle,
Here you will find information on how to
you should first read this chapter.
Audio use Tele Aid and the Search and Send
Here you will find all information regarding function.
System settings the audio function and its radio, HD Radio,
Here you will find all the important infor- SatRadio, CD-audio/DVD audio/MP3, mu-
sic register, Media Interface and audio aux Indexes
mation regarding the system settings of
modes. The technical terminology glossary ex-
the COMAND.
plains the most important technical terms.
Content and keyword indexes are intended
to help you find information quickly.

9
Introduction
Symbols
왘 This symbol points to in- -> This symbol is used in the
Symbols
structions for you to follow. glossary. It indicates that
You will find the following symbols in these A number of these symbols the term immediately follow-
operating instructions: appearing in succession in- ing the symbol is also ex-
dicates a multiple-step pro- plained in the glossary.
G Warning cedure. Display Messages, menu items or
Warning notices draw your attention to ha- 컄컄 The continuation symbol soft key names appearing in
zards that may endanger your health or life, marks an interrupted proce- the COMAND color display
or the health or life of others. dure which will be continued are printed in the style
on the next page. shown here.
! Highlights hazards that may result in dam- (컄 page 11) This symbol tells you where
age to your COMAND. to look for further infor-
mation on this subject.
i Helpful hints or further information you may
find useful.

10
 Introduction
Operating safety
Operating safety G Warning G Warning
G Warning In order to avoid distraction which could While the navigation system provides direc-
lead to an accident, the driver should enter tional assistance, the driver must remain fo-
Any alterations of electronic components or system settings while the vehicle is at a cused on safe driving behavior, especially
software can cause malfunctions. standstill, and operate the system only attention to traffic and street signs, and
Radio, satellite radio, amplifier, DVD chang- when permitted by road, weather and traffic should utilize the system’s audio cues while
er, navigation module, telephone and Voice conditions. driving.
Control systems are interconnected. There- Bear in mind that at a speed of just The navigation system does not supply any
fore, if one of the components is not opera- 30 mp/h (approximately 50 km/h), your car information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic
tional, or has not been removed/ replaced covers a distance of 44 feet (approximately regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob-
properly, the function of other components 14 m) every second. servance always remains in the driver’s per-
could be impaired. sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover
COMAND supplies you with information to
Such conditions might seriously impair the help you select your route more easily and all areas nor all routes within an area.
operating safety of your vehicle. guide you conveniently and safely to your
We recommend to have any service work on destination. For safety reasons, we encour- This device complies with Part 15 of the
electronic components carried out by an au- age the driver to stop the vehicle in a safe FCC Rules.
thorized Mercedes-Benz Center. place before answering or placing a call, or Operation is subject to the following two
consulting the COMAND screen to read nav- conditions:
igational maps, instructions, or downloaded
(1) This device may not cause harmful in-
information.
terference, and
(2) This device must accept any interfer-
ence received, including interference
that may cause undesired operation.

11
Introduction
Operating safety
! NOTE: This equipment has been tested and
G Warning found to comply with the limits for a Class A dig- G Warning
ital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules.
Change or modification not expressly ap- This equipment complies with FCC radiation
These limits are designed to provide reasonable
proved by the party responsible for compli- exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled
protection against harmful interference when
ance could void the user's authority to equipment and meets the FCC radio fre-
the equipment is operated in a commercial envi-
operate this equipment. quency (RF) Exposure Guidelines in Supple-
ronment. This equipment generates, uses and
ment C to OET65.
can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not in-
stalled and used in accordance with the instruc- This equipment has very low levels of RF en-
tion manual, may cause harmful interference to ergy that is deemed to comply without max-
radio communications. imum permissive exposure evaluation
(MPE). But it is desirable that it should be in-
G Warning stalled and operated with at least 8 inches
(20 cm) and more between the radiator and
This transmitter must not be co-located or person's body (excluding extremities:
operated in conjunction with any other an- hands, wrists feet and legs.)
tenna or tranmitter.

12
 Introduction
Operating safety
Declaration of conformity regarding i Tampering with electronic components or Function restrictions when driving
the distribution of telecommunica- systems (e.g. radio, DVD changer) and their soft- the vehicle
ware may result in malfunctioning. Systems
tions equipment For safety reasons, some COMAND func-
which have not been changed may be affected
Daimler AG declares herewith that this due to the connectivity of the electronics. tions are restricted or not available when
device conforms to the basic requirements Malfunctions of the electronics can seriously en- the vehicle is moving. This can be recog-
and the other relevant regulations of danger the operational safety of your vehicle. nized, for example, from the fact that cer-
Directive 1999/5/EC (RTTE Directive). tain menu items cannot be selected or the
i Always have all work or modifications to COMAND displays a corresponding mes-
Intended purpose electronic components carried out by a qualified
sage.
specialist workshop with the necessary exper-
Please bear the following information in
tise and tools for any work required.
mind when using the COMAND: Daimler AG recommends a Mercedes-Benz ser-
앫 The safety instructions in this guide vice center for this purpose.
앫 Road Traffic Regulations Especially for safety-related operations and op-
erations on safety-related systems, servicing by
a qualified specialist workshop is essential.

13
14
 At a glance
COMAND Control System. . . . . . .16
Multifunction Steering Wheel . . .21
Operating COMAND . . . . . . . . . . .26
Basic Functions of COMAND . . . .31

15
At a glance
COMAND Control System
COMAND Control System

16
 At a glance
COMAND Control System

Function Page Function Page Function Page

1 b 133 8 COMAND display b í
Switch to radio mode 9 Number keypad Press briefly:
Leave the menu and switch
Switch wavebands Select stations via the sta-
to the next menu level up 28
tion preset 135
2 Ï Press and hold:
Switch to system menu 36 Store stations manually 136 Switch to the basic display
Enter the Bluetooth passkey 106 of the current operating
3 é
Enter the phone number 121 mode 28
Switch to CD audio/DVD 156
audio and MP3 operation Send DTMF tones 123 c C
Switch to video DVD mode Í Press briefly:
Delete individual characters
4 h Set map scale (enlarge) 53
Store the setting
Switch to phone main menu 112 Ì
or address book Hide or show the menu
Set map scale (reduce) 53
system
5 Î a î
Press and hold:
Load/Eject button 150 Press briefly: Accepts a list entry
6 Disc slot Delete individual characters 28
d $/%/&/(
Loading CDs/DVDs 150 Press and hold:
Erase an entire entry 28 Select a station
Ejecting CDs/DVDs 152 Select a track
Update the map software 47 Select menu items or list en-
7 SD memory card slot tries
Loading SD memory card 152 Exit menus or lists
Ejecting SD memory card 154 Scroll the map

17
At a glance
COMAND Control System
Function Page Vehicle Equipment COMAND Display
e Adjust the volume 31 i This Operator’s manual describes all fea- The currently selected function and the
tures, standard or optional, potentially available associated menus are shown on the
f Switch COMAND on or off 31 for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please COMAND display. The COMAND display is
g H/G be aware that your vehicle might not be divided into several areas.
equipped with all features described in this man-
Select stations 135 ual.
Select the next/previous
track 159 Function Overview
Fast rewind/forward 170 With COMAND you can operate the follow-
ing main functions:
h s 앫 the navigation system
Accept a call 121 앫 the audio function with the
Redial 121 radio, HD Radio™, SatRadio, disc (CD
j t audio, DVD audio or MP3 mode),
SD memory card (MP3 mode), Music Example: Audio main function display
Reject a call 121 Register, Media Interface and Audio
End an active call 123 Aux operating modes 1 Status line
2 Main function line
k F 앫 the telephone and the address book
3 Main area
function
Switch the sound on and off 31 4 Submenu line
앫 DVD video
Switch off navigation an- The status line 1 displays the time and
nouncements 31 앫 the system functions the current telephone status.
l . You can call up the main functions: With the main function line 2 you can se-
앫 using the hard keys ., b, h, lect the main function. The selection is
Switch to navigation mode 53
é or Ï. made using the & and ( buttons
(컄 page 26).
앫 using the main function menu items in
the COMAND display.

18
 At a glance
COMAND Control System
In this example, the Audio main function is Menu Overview
set to the radio mode and the main area 3
is active. Having selected a main function, you will
see the submenu at the bottom edge of the
i The arrangement of the menus can vary, de- COMAND display.
pending on the equipment. Normally, the menus
for the full equipment version are shown in this If one of the main functions such as Navi-
guide. gation, Audio or Phone is currently select-
ed, additional menus are available from the
main function line (컄 page 20).
The availability of additional menus is indi-
cated by a small triangle behind the main
function label.

1 Triangle indicating an additional menu

19
At a glance
COMAND Control System
Main Function Menu Items
The table below illustrates the structure of the main functions and the associated menu items.

Navi Audio Phone Video System

Map Display FM / AM Radio Phone DVD Video
Mode SatRadio Address Book Video Aux
Block Area Disc
Save Off-road Route Memory Card (MP3 mode)
Information On Map Music Register
D Highway Information Media Interface
Aux

20
 At a glance
Multifunction Steering Wheel
Multifunction Steering Wheel The displays in the multifunction display 5 Press Button briefly
are controlled by the buttons on the multi-
j
G Warning function steering wheel.
k
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic Function
conditions must always be his/her primary
Within Audio/DVD menu to select
1 Multifunction display previous or next track, scene or
focus when driving.
Operating the Control System stored station.
For your safety and the safety of others, se-
lecting features through the multifunction Within Telephone menu to switch
2 Selecting the submenu or setting
steering wheel should only be done by the to the phone book and select a
the volume:
driver when traffic and road conditions per- name or number.
Press button
mit it to be done safely. Press and hold Button
æ up/to increase
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph j
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is ç down/to decrease
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- k
3 Telephone:
ly 14 m) every second. Press button Within Audio/DVD menu to select
previous or next track with quick
s to take a call, to dial, search or to select previous or next
to redial station in station list or wave band.
t to end a call, Within Telephone menu to start the
to reject an incoming call
quick search in the phone book.
4 Menu systems:
Press button
è for next menu
· for previous menu

Example: CLS-Class steering wheel

21
At a glance
Multifunction Steering Wheel
Depending on the selected menu, pressing The individual functions are found within If you press button k or j repeated-
the buttons on the multifunction steering the relevant menu (Radio or CD operations ly, you will pass through each function dis-
wheel will alter what appears in the multi- under AUDIO, for example). These func- play, one after the other, in the current
function display. tions serve to call up relevant information. menu.
The information available in the multifunc- It is helpful to think of the menus, and the The number of menus available in the sys-
tion display is arranged in menus, each functions within each menu, as being ar- tem depends on which optional equipment
containing a number of functions or sub- ranged in a circular pattern. is installed in your vehicle.
menus. If you press button è or ÿ repeated- The menus are described on the following
ly, you will pass through each menu one af- pages.
ter the other.

Multifunction Display Menus

Menus Functions and Submenus

AUDIO (컄 page 23) 앫 Selecting radio station
앫 Selecting satellite radio station
앫 Operating DVD changer, Music Register, Memory Card, Media Interface
NAVI (컄 page 24) Display
앫 route guidance instructions
앫 current street name and direction of travel

TEL (컄 page 24) 앫 Answering a call

앫 Ending and rejecting a call
앫 Selecting a phone book entry
앫 Redialing
i The headings used in the menus table are designed to facilitate navigation within the system and are not necessarily identical to those shown in
the control system displays. The first function displayed in each menu will automatically show you which part of the system you are in.

22
 At a glance
Multifunction Steering Wheel
AUDIO Menu Selecting Satellite Radio Station Operating DVD Changer, Music Regis-
The satellite radio is treated as a radio ap- ter, Memory Card, Media Interface
The functions in the AUDIO menu operate
the audio equipment which you currently plication. Selecting a track or scene
have turned on. 왘 From COMAND select SatRadio in the 왘 From COMAND select a source from
If no audio equipment is currently turned Audio menu. the Audio menu.
on, the message AUDIO OFF appears in the 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly
multifunction display. until you see the currently tuned sta- until the audio source currently being
The following functions are available: tion in the multifunction display. played appears in the multifunction dis-
왘 Select next or previous stored play.
Selecting Radio Stations channel: 왘 Selecting previous or next track:
왘 From COMAND select FM/AM Radio in the Press button k or j briefly to Press button k or j briefly.
Audio menu. select a stored channel.
왘 Selecting a track from the track list
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly 왘 Select next or previous channel (quick search):
until you see the currently tuned sta- in the channel list: Press and hold k or j.
tion in the multifunction display. Press and hold k or j to select
a channel. i Track selection may depend on selected set-
왘 Select next or previous stored tings in COMAND or the connected device.
station:
Press button k or j briefly to
select a stored station.
왘 Select next or previous station in
the station list:
Press and hold k or jto select a
station.
i You can only store new stations using the
COMAND controls.

23
At a glance
Multifunction Steering Wheel
NAVI Menu TEL Menu
G Warning
The NAV menu contains the functions
needed to operate your navigation system. G Warning Never operate radio transmitters equipped
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
왘 Press button è or ÿ repeatedly A driver's attention to the road must always out being connected to an external antenna)
until you see the message NAV in the be his/her primary focus when driving. For from inside the vehicle while the engine is
multifunction display. your safety and the safety of others, we rec- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
ommend that you pull over to a safe location tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
The message shown in the multifunction and stop before placing or taking a tele-
display depends on the status of the navi- sibly resulting in an accident and/or
phone call. If you choose to use the mobile personal injury.
gation system: phone while driving, please use the hands-
앫 with COMAND switched off, the mes- free device and only use the mobile phone
when weather, road, and traffic conditions
You can use the functions in the TEL menu
sage NAV OFF appears in the multi- to operate your mobile phone, provided it
function display. permit.
is connected to a hands-free system and
앫 with COMAND switched on but route Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from switched on.
guidance not activated, the direction of using a cellular mobile phone while driving
a vehicle. 왘 Switch on the mobile phone and
travel and, if applicable, the name of COMAND.
the street currently traveled on appear Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
in the multifunction display. (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is 왘 Press button ÿ or è on the
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- steering wheel repeatedly until the TEL
앫 with COMAND switched on and route
ly 14 m) every second. menu appears in the multifunction dis-
guidance activated, the direction of play.
travel and maneuver instructions ap-
pear in the multifunction display.

24
 At a glance
Multifunction Steering Wheel
Which message appears in the multifunc- Dialing a Number from the Phone Book i If no contacts have been downloaded from
tion display depends on your mobile If your mobile phone is ready to receive the mobile phone, 'No entries' appears in the
phone's authorization and on/off status: calls, you may select and dial a number multifunction display when j or k is
앫 If the mobile phone has not yet been from the phone book at any time. pressed.
authorized, the message in the multi- 왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly 왘 Press button s.
function display is: Bluetooth Ready. until the TEL menu appears in the mul- The system dials the selected phone
앫 If the mobile phone is switched on and tifunction display. number.
authorized, the message in the multi- 왘 Press button j or k repeatedly If the connection is successful and this
function display is: READY. until the desired name or number ap- feature is supported by your network
Answering a Call pears in the multifunction display. provider, the name of the party you are
왘 To scroll through the list of names calling (if stored in your phone book)
When your mobile phone is ready to re- will appear in the multifunction display.
ceive calls, you can answer a call at any or numbers using the quick search
time. In the multifunction display you will mode: If no connection is made, the control
see a corresponding message or, if avail- Press and hold button j or k for system stores the dialed number in the
able, the caller ID (name and number): longer than one second. Calls dialed memory.
왘 Press button s. The system scrolls rapidly through the
list of names or numbers until you re-
You have answered the call. lease the button.
Ending a Call or Rejecting an Incoming The stored names are displayed in as-
Call cending or descending alphabetical or-
der.
왘 Press button t.
왘 To cancel the quick search mode:
Press button t.

25
At a glance
Operating COMAND
Redialing 왘 To switch back to main function
Operating COMAND
The control system stores the most recent- line 1: Press $ and C.
ly dialed phone numbers. This eliminates Opening Menu for a Main Function The Audio menu appears.
the need to search through your entire Example: Audio Menu
phone book. Selecting Menu Item
왘 Press button ÿ or è repeatedly Example 1: Radio, Station Memory
until the TEL menu appears in the mul-
tifunction display.
You will see the Ready message.
왘 Press button s.
In the multifunction display you see the
first number in the Calls dialed memo-
ry.
왘 Press button j or k repeatedly
until the desired name appears in the 1 Main function line
multifunction display. 2 Audio menu
3 The symbolRindicates current operat- 1 Selector bar
왘 Press button s. ing mode
The control system dials the selected Selecting Menu Item
왘 To switch to main function line 1:
phone number. Press $. 왘 Press $ or %.
왘 To select Audio main function: The selector bar moves up and down
Press & or (. within the list.
왘 To confirm selection: Press C. Confirming Menu Item
You will see the main display for the se- 왘 Press C.
lected audio mode.

26
 At a glance
Operating COMAND
Exiting the Menu Without Selecting Switching Menu Bar When entering characters, the list entry at
왘 Press & or ( against the list di- 왘 Press $ or %. the top always displays an entry that best
rection. matches the characters already entered.
Confirming Menu Item COMAND automatically adds matching let-
Example 2: Navigation, Enter Destina- ters to those already entered by the user.
왘 Press C.
tion Menu
Entering Characters
Character Entry
The example shows a list of cities during Using the Speller
destination entry in the navigation.
왘 To select characters:
Press & or (.
왘 Press $ or % to switch between
the lines in the speller.
왘 To confirm character selection:
Press C.
A possible option:
Enter Destination menu 왘 To switch predictive speller lan-
1 Menu with upper and lower menu bar guage (character set): Select !.
2 Selector bar
1 Predictive speller with number and With Number Keypad
Selecting Menu Item character line Alternatively, you can enter characters us-
왘 Press & or (. i In the predictive speller 1 you can only se- ing the number keypad (direct input).
lect characters that are currently available. The Example:
The selector bar moves horizontally.
set of characters that is available depends on the
characters already entered and the data for the 왘 Press one of the number keys, e.g.
digital map. 2, once or repeatedly in succes-
sion.

컄컄

27
At a glance
Operating COMAND
After you have pressed it the first time, Deleting an Entry Accepting First List Entry
the character display appears at the
왘 To delete individual characters: Se- 왘 Press and hold C until the
lower edge of the display. The first
available letter is highlighted. lect õ at the bottom right of the Enter Destination menu appears.
speller and press C. Here you will find the accepted list
or entry.
왘 Press the î button. or
왘 To delete an entire entry: Select If COMAND can match the characters en-
õ and press and hold C until the tered definitively to one town, the Enter
entire entry has been deleted. Destination menu appears automatically
or with the selected list entry.
왘 Press and hold î until the entire en- Switching to the List Without Predictive
try has been deleted. Speller
You see which characters you can enter Cancelling an Entry If other entries for a town exist, or the
with that key. Each time you press the key, name exists more than once in the system,
the next character is highlighted. 왘 Select á at the bottom left of the then B is highlighted in the speller.
speller and press C. 왘 Press C.
For example, key 2:
or You can switch to the list at any point while
앫 Press once = A
왘 Press the í button. entering characters.
앫 Press twice = B
COMAND goes one step back in the se- 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the list ap-
앫 Press three times = C
lection procedure. pears without the speller.
Wait until the character display disap-
If you press and hold the í button, or
pears.
COMAND shows the basic display of 왘 Select B and press C.
the current operating mode (e.g. radio
display).

28
 At a glance
Operating COMAND
COMAND will complete your entry if Operating Example Switching to the Current Audio Mode
the name is unambiguous. In this case 왘 To switch to the main function line:
it is not necessary to switch to the list, Switching to Radio Mode and Request- Press $.
the Enter Destination menu will appear. ing the List of Preset Stations
왘 To select Audio main function:
Selecting a List Entry Initial situation: Press & or (.
You would like to switch, for example, from 왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
the phone function to radio mode and re-
The main display for the audio mode
quest the presets list from there.
selected last, e.g. CD audio, appears.
i In this guide, the path to a menu item is The selector bar is located in the main
shown as an action in a special typeface. area.
Audio£Audio£
FM/AM Radio£Radio£Presets
i Depending on the initial situation, this se-
quence of actions may be shorter.
If radio mode was active last, it is sufficient to se-
Town list for navigation lect Audio£FM/AM Radio£Presets.
왘 To select a town: Press $ or %. The individual steps for the above example
are described below.
왘 To confirm selection: Press C.

1 Selector bar

29
At a glance
Operating COMAND
Switching to Radio Mode
i You can also call up the required audio
mode directly using the b or é button.
왘 To select Audio again: Press $.
왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
The Audio menu appears.

Tuning to a Station Manually

왘 Press % to highlight the lower menu
bar.
왘 Press & or ( to select FM or AM.
왘 Tune to a station by pressing & or
(.
왘 To select FM / AM Radio: The red line (tuning indicator) moves
왘 Press $. right or left and stops when a receiv-
able station is found.
왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
The radio main display appears.

30
 At a glance
Basic Functions of COMAND
Basic Functions of COMAND Switching Navigation Announcements Volume of Navigation Announcements
On/Off
i The COMAND components can be found on You can set the volume for navigation an-
(컄 page 16). Operating examples can be found 왘 Press F during the announcement. nouncements independently of the volume
on (컄 page 26). for the active audio or video source.
The navigation announcements are
i For many operating functions you can also switched on again after restarting route During a navigation announcement:
use the buttons on the multifunction steering guidance or after switching COMAND off/
wheel, e.g. for volume setting the æ, ç 왘 Turn the rotary/push button x.
on using x.
buttons, (컄 page 21).
i The navigation announcements can also be Setting Volume for Phone Calls
Switching COMAND On/Off switched back on by selecting the softkey 6
The volume for hands-free operation can
in the navigation menu.
왘 Press the rotary/push button x. be set during an active phone call.
A warning message appears. COMAND Setting the Volume 왘 Turn the rotary/push button x.
opens the last active menu. 왘 To set:
Turn the rotary/push button x.
Mute
The volume of the selected audio or
왘 To switch on/off: Press F.
video source changes.
The sound from the active audio or
video source is switched on or off.
i When the sound is switched off, the symbol
X appears in the status line.
If you change the audio or video source or alter
the volume, the sound is automatically switched
on again.
i Announcements from the navigation system
can still be heard with the sound switched off.

31
At a glance
Basic Functions of COMAND
Selecting Sound Settings Setting Balance and Fader
You can select different sound settings for The balance determines whether the
each audio and video source. The sound sound intensity is higher on the driver’s
menu can be opened from the submenu of side or on the front passenger’s side.
the desired operating mode. The fader determines whether the sound
Examples: intensity is higher in the front or in the rear
Audio£FM / AM Radio£Sound of the vehicle.
Audio£Disc£Sound 왘 Select Sound£Bal/Fad
(Balance/Fader).
Setting Bass and Treble Setting treble and bass
왘 Select Sound£Treble or Bass. 1 Last selected setting
2 Current setting
The last selected setting is indicated by
an empty bar. 왘 To change setting:
Press $ or % until the desired
treble or bass setting is reached.
왘 To save setting: Press C.
The setting is stored and the menu is
exited.
왘 To exit menu without changes: Setting balance and fader (display image
Press the í, & or ( button. may differ depending on model)
1 Current setting
왘 To change setting: Press $, %,
& or ( until the desired bal-
ance/fader setting is achieved.

32
 At a glance
Basic Functions of COMAND
왘 To save setting: Press C. i The “LOGIC7 ®
On” function of the harman/ i By selecting “LOGIC7® Off”, the playback
kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound system per- of all playable formats is performed as on the ex-
The setting is stored and the menu is
mits the playback of discrete 5.1 and stereo re- isting medium. Due to the spatial conditions in
exited. cordings with an optimal surround sound the vehicle, optimal sound is not possible in all
왘 To exit menu without changes: Press platform for each passenger. Music and films on seats.
the Back button í. CD or audio and video DVDs with high-resolution
surround formats, such as MLP, DTS or Dolby i Discs supporting the above-mentioned au-
Surround Sound Digital, are played with optimum sound. dio formats display the following logos
Your vehicle is equipped with the harman/ The LOGIC7® distributes the 5.1 surround infor- 앫 Dolby Digital
kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound system. mation over the 12-channel system architecture
You can select between “LOGIC7® On” and to provide the optimum sound in all seats. This
“LOGIC7® Off”. produces the sound characteristics as intended
by the sound engineer during the original record-
harman/kardon LOGIC7® Surround Sound ing.
is available for the following operating harman/kardon LOGIC7® converts all two-chan- 앫 DTS
modes: nel stereo sound sources into multi-channel sur-
앫 Radio (FM only) round sound. The surround information stored
during the original recording is read out using
앫 SatRadio LOGIC7® and likewise distributed over the
앫 CD audio 12 channels. No effects are created during the
process, anything that was always on the record-
앫 DVD audio (MLP, DTS, PCM and Dolby 앫 MLP
ing is just made audible again.
Digital audio formats) Moreover, harman/kardon LOGIC7® draws the
앫 MP3 (including SD memory card) audible sound source away from the individual
loudspeakers, thus creating a natural 360°
앫 Aux
sound platform for each passenger.
앫 DVD video (PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital
audio formats)
i As some DVDs contain both stereo and also
multi-channel audio formats, it may be neces-
sary to set the audio format (컄 page 149).

33
At a glance
Basic Functions of COMAND
Setting the Surround Sound i Please note the following:
For surround sound, you can select be- 앫 For an optimal sound in all seats, balance
tween LOGIC7® On and LOGIC7® Off. and fader should be set to the centre of the
passenger compartment with LOGIC7®
왘 Select Sound£Surround. switched on.
앫 The best sound results are achieved when
playing high-quality audio and video DVD
discs.
앫 For MP3 tracks, the bit rate should be at
least 128 kbps.
앫 Surround playback does not function with
mono signal sources such as the AM wave
range in radio mode.
앫 In the case of poor radio reception quality,
e.g. in tunnels, LOGIC7® should be switched
Surround sound setting (display image may off, as otherwise a dynamic switchover from
differ depending on model) stereo to mono and thus temporary sound
characteristic shifts can occur.
왘 To select the setting: Press $ or
앫 With certain stereo recordings, the sound
%.
characteristic may deviate from convention-
왘 To save setting: Press C. al stereo playback.
The setting is stored and the menu is
exited.
To exit menu without changes:
Press the í, & or ( button.

34
 System Settings
Opening System menu .................36
Menu Overview..............................36
Time Settings.................................37
Setting the System Language......38
Display Settings ............................38
Read-out Settings..........................39
Voice Control Settings..................39
Bluetooth® Settings ......................41
Reset...............................................43
Rear View Camera.........................44

35
System Settings
System Settings
System Settings Menu Overview
Vehicle Equipment Settings Display Off
i This Operator’s manual describes all fea- Time (컄 page 37) (컄 page 37)
tures, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please Language
be aware that your vehicle might not be (컄 page 38)
equipped with all features described in this man- Display (컄 page 38)
ual.
Text Reader Speed
Opening System Menu (컄 page 39)
왘 Press the function button Ï. Voice control Settings menu
or (컄 page 39)
왘 Select System in the menu bar with main Rear View Camera
functions. (컄 page 44)
Bluetooth
(컄 page 41)
Reset (컄 page 43)
(resets COMAND to
factory settings)
i Use this function
to delete your personal
data, e.g. before selling
your vehicle.

1 Settings menu
2 Switching off the display

36
 System Settings
System Settings
Switching the Display On/Off Time Settings i The increment for setting the minutes de-
pends on the situation. It is 30 minutes if the ve-
왘 To switch the display off: hicle is equipped with a navigation system and if
Setting the Time
Select System£Display Off. GPS is being received. It is one minute if GPS re-
The display is switched off. i The correct time is essential for the follow- ception is not available.
ing system functions to operate correctly:
왘 To switch on the display: i If you change the time in 30 minute steps,
앫 Calculation of estimated time of arrival previously selected settings for time zone and
Press the C button, the í button
or one of the (, &, $, % 앫 Time stamps for calls received and calls di- switching between summer time and standard
aled time are lost (컄 page 38).
buttons.
or 왘 Select System £ Settings £ Time £ Setting Time/Date Format
Set Time.
왘 Press the D button. 왘 Select System £ Settings £ Time £
The system menu appears. Format.
i You can also press one of the function but- The format list appears. The dotsRin
tons, e.g. the é button. This turns on the dis- front of the list entries indicate the cur-
play and switches to the corresponding function. rent setting.
i The abbreviations mean:
Date format: DD - Day, MM - Month,
YY/YYYY - Year
Time format: HH - Hour, MM - Minute for
24-hour and AM/PM format
1 Sets the time 왘 To change format setting:
2 Current date Press % or $.
왘 To set value: Press % or $. 왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
왘 To save setting: Press C. 왘 To save setting and quit menu:
Press ( or &.

37
System Settings
System Settings
Setting Time Zone and Switching be- Setting the System Language Display Settings
tween Daylight Saving Time and Stan-
왘 Select System £Settings £ Language.
dard Time Adjusting Brightness
The language list appears.
i The correct time zone and daylight saving/ The dotRindicates the current setting. 왘 Select System £ Settings £
standard time settings are essential for the fol- Display £ Brightness.
lowing system functions to operate correctly: 왘 To change setting: Select the desired
앫 Calculation of estimated time of arrival
language.
앫 Time stamps for calls received and calls di- The language is set.
aled If you select the list entry Synchronize Lan-
왘 To set time zone: Select System £ guage, the system language is set to the lan-
Settings £ Time £ Time Zone. guage of the vehicle’s multifunction
display.
A time zone list appears.
왘 Press % or $ to select the ap-
propriate time zone.
왘 To switch between Daylight Saving 1 Brightness bar
and standard time: Select Daylight Sa-
ving Time (Summer) or Standard Time (Win- 왘 To adjust brightness:
ter). Press % or $.
The dotRin front of a list entry indi- The brightness bar moves up or down.
cates the current setting. 왘 To confirm selection:
왘 To save setting and exit menu: Press C or press (.
Press ( or &.

38
 System Settings
System Settings
Setting the Display Design Voice Control Settings Starting New Individualization Process
왘 Select System £ Settings £ Display. i You can only start the individualization func-
Switching Help Screen On/Off tion when the vehicle is stationary. First switch
왘 Select Day Mode or Night Mode or Automatic. off all interfering units/functions. After starting,
왘 Select System £ Settings £ Voice Con-
The dotRin front of the list entry indi- the system will take you through the training by
trol.
cates the current selection. means of audible instructions.
왘 Select Help Window.
i In the Automatic setting, COMAND evaluates 왘 Select System £ Settings £ Voice Con-
the automatic vehicle light sensor and automati- This switches the help screen on D or trol £ Start New Individualization.
cally switches over the display design. off C.
You will be visually and audibly prompt-
i In addition to the audible instructions, the ed to confirm whether you would like
Read-out Settings help screen displays other information during additional information.
Setting Reading Speed the individualization process and the later voice
control mode. 왘 Select Yes or No.
You can use this feature to adjust the read- If you select No, the first part of the indi-
out speed of the address book via voice Individualization Function vidualization will start. You will be
control. prompted to confirm that you wish to
You can use the individualization function practice numbers or voice commands.
왘 Select System £ Settings £ Text Reader
option to adapt the Voice control system
Speed. If you select Yes, an information screen
to your own voice and therefore improve
The list of possible speeds appears. will appear and you will hear informa-
voice recognition. This will affect the ability
The dotRin front of the list entry indi- tion about the sequence of the individ-
of the system to recognize the voices of
cates the current setting. ualization process. The first part of the
other users, and for this reason it can be
individualization then starts automati-
왘 Select the desired speed. switched off (컄 page 40).
cally.
The new setting is stored. The individualization function comprises
or
two parts and lasts around 5 minutes. Dur-
ing the process you will practice a few
number sequences and voice commands.

컄컄

39
System Settings
System Settings
왘 To close display: Press C. The individualization is ended once the Deleting any previous individualization
You will be prompted to confirm second part has been completed. A corre- data
that you wish to practice numbers sponding message is displayed. The data 왘 Select System £ Settings £ Voice Con-
or voice commands. from the second part is saved automatical- trol £ Delete Individualization.
ly.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you really wish to delete it.
왘 Select Yes or No.
The individualization data will be delet-
ed or retained on the basis of the selec-
tion. A corresponding message is
displayed.
Switching individualization on/off
왘 Select System £ Settings £ Voice Con-
Once the first part is over, you will be trol £ Individualization On.
prompted to confirm that you wish to Cancelling first or second part of indi- This switches the individualization on
start the second part. vidualization process D or off C.
왘 Select Yes or No. 왘 Select Cancel.
If you select No, the individualization is You will be prompted to confirm that
cancelled. The data from the first part you really wish to cancel.
is saved automatically. 왘 Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the second part of the If you select Yes, the individualization is
individualization will start. cancelled. The data from the cancelled
part will be lost.
If you select No, the cancelled part of
the individualization will restart.

40
 System Settings
System Settings
Bluetooth® Settings You can connect a maximum of 10 devices When first entering the device list and be-
to COMAND. fore running an update, the black
General Information on Bluetooth® The connection process includes search- dotRindicates the active phone (found
ing for a device and then authorizing it. and authorized).
Bluetooth® is a technology for wireless
data communication over short distances After running an update:
Opening the Bluetooth® device list and
of up to approx. 30 feet. Using Bluetooth®
searching for a device
you can exchange business cards (vCards),
for example. 왘 To open the list: Select System
£Settings £ Bluetooth £ Bluetooth
Switching Bluetooth® on/off Device List.
왘 Select System £ Settings £ Bluetooth 왘 To start search: Select Update.
£ Activate Bluetooth. COMAND starts searching for devices
This switches Bluetooth® on D or in the reception range. After a short
off C. time, the device list appears.
i If you open the device list again, the list of
Connecting Bluetooth® Devices authorized devices appears. 1 Currently connectedRand authorized
i In order to connect Bluetooth® devices, 왘 To cancel search: Select Cancel. device (here a mobile phone ¿)
Bluetooth® must be activated on the COMAND 2 Device not within range but previously
and on the particular device. In addition, a Blue- The device list may contain the following authorized (¿ appears in grey)
tooth® device must be ‘visible’ for COMAND, so devices: 3 Newly detected device in range, not yet
that COMAND can find it and display it. The pro- 앫 All (available) devices found, regardless authorized
cedure for performing this setting is given in the of whether they have been authorized
manual for the Bluetooth® device.
Phone icons indicate if a phone is found
or not. (black) or not (grey).
The following types of devices can be con- 앫 All authorized devices, regardless of The check marks indicate if a phone has
nected to COMAND via Bluetooth®: whether they have been found (are been authorized (black) or not (grey).
앫 Mobile phone available) or not. 컄컄

앫 Portable personal computer

41
System Settings
System Settings
i If the device list already contains ten autho- i If the authorization of a device, which had 왘 To enter passcode on COMAND:
rized devices, you will have to withdraw the au- been authorized in the past, has been withdrawn Select digits one after another.
thorization for (de-authorize) one of the and it is no longer found in the search, the device
왘 To cancel entry on COMAND:
authorized devices. You will then have to switch list no longer includes this device.
Devices that have been authorized in the past Select Back.
this device off and start the search again. Other-
wise the new device you are looking for will not but not found in the search are either not 왘 To confirm entry on COMAND:
appear in the list. switched on or are not in the vehicle. Select B.
i If you reopen the device list at a later time, 왘 Select the as yet unauthorized device 왘 Enter the same passcode on the Blue-
this will contain all previously authorized devic- (no check mark yet). tooth® device (컄 operating manual for
es. 왘 Select Options £ Authorize. the relevant device).
Displaying Details on a Bluetooth ® The input menu for the passcode ap- The device is authorized.
Device pears.
왘 Open the Bluetooth® device list
(컄 page 41).
왘 Select the desired device.
왘 Select Options £ Details.
The details screen for the device is dis-
played.
왘 To close details screen:
Press % or $.
Authorizing a Bluetooth® Device i The passcode is any number with between
® one and sixteen digits that you can select your-
왘 Open the Bluetooth device list
self. You must enter the same number on
(컄 page 41). COMAND and on the device to be authorized.
왘 Select Update. Please also refer to the instructions in the Blue-
tooth device manual.

42
 System Settings
System Settings
External Authorization De-authorizing a Bluetooth® Device Reset
If COMAND cannot find your mobile phone, 왘 Open the Bluetooth® device list i You can fully reset COMAND to the factory
this may be due to special security settings (컄 page 41). settings. This process deletes all personal data,
on your mobile phone. In this case, you can among other things, (e.g. station memory, ad-
왘 Select the authorized device.
check whether, conversely, your mobile dress book entries, entries in the destination
phone can find COMAND. 왘 Select Options £ De-Authorize. memory and in the last destinations of the navi-
® You will be asked whether the device gation system). It is recommended that you per-
COMAND’s Bluetooth device name is form a reset before the vehicle is handed over or
“MB Bluetooth”. should really be de-authorized.
sold, for example.
왘 In the Phone submenu select System £ 왘 Select Yes or No.
왘 Select System £ System Settings £ Re-
Settings£ Bluetooth£Bluetooth Device After selecting Yes, the authorization of set.
List£Options£External Authorization. the device is withdrawn.
You will be prompted to confirm that
왘 Start Bluetooth® search procedure on you wish to perform the reset.
the mobile phone (컄 mobile phone op-
erating guide). 왘 Select Yes or No.
왘 Select COMAND (“MB Bluetooth”) from After selecting Yes, you will again be
the device list on your mobile phone. prompted to confirm that you wish to
perform the reset.
왘 When prompted to do so, enter the
passcode on the mobile phone and on 왘 Select Yes or No.
COMAND. After selecting Yes, COMAND is reset
and restarted.

43
 Rear View Camera 왘 Select Activation by R gear. Depending
on the previous state the function is
COMAND shows the camera picture on the switched on D or off C.
display when
앫 the function is switched on in the System
Settings menu and
앫 the car is changed into reverse gear
As soon as you change back into forward
gear, the previous display is shown.
Switching On/Off the Display of the
Rear View Camera
왘 Switch to System Menu

System settings menu with Rear View

Camera option
왘 Select Settings£Rear View Camera

44
 Navigation
Introduction. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Destination Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
POI Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Route Guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Destination Memory . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Last Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . .101

45
Navigation
Introduction
Introduction Safety Instructions G Warning
Vehicle Equipment G Warning COMAND may give incorrect navigation
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- commands if the data in the digital map
tures, standard or optional, potentially available For safety reasons, only enter a destination does not correspond with the actual road/
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please when the vehicle is stationary. When the ve- traffic situation. Digital maps do not cover
be aware that your vehicle might not be hicle is in motion, a passenger should enter all areas nor all routes within an area. For ex-
equipped with all features described in this man- the destination. Study manual and select ample, if the traffic routing has been
ual. route before driving. changed or the direction of a one-way road
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph has been reversed.
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is For this reason, you must always observe
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- applicable road and traffic rules and regula-
ly 14 m) every second. tions during your journey. Road and traffic
COMAND calculates the route to the desti- rules and regulations always have priority
nation without taking account of the follow- over the navigation commands generated by
ing: the system.
앫 Traffic lights
앫 Stop and right-of-way signs G Warning
앫 Lane merging
Navigation announcements are intended to
앫 Parking or stopping prohibited areas direct you while driving without diverting
앫 Other road and traffic rules and regula- your attention from the road and driving.
tions Please always use this feature instead of
앫 Narrow bridges consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your at-
tention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.

46
 Navigation
Introduction
Update Sequence
Updating the Map Software G Warning
The digital data for the map software will The sequence includes the following stag-
become obsolete, just like conventional es: Never leave the engine running in an en-
road maps. Optimum route guidance by closed space. The exhaust gases contain
앫 Loading DVD into the DVD changer carbon monoxide. Inhaling exhaust gases
the navigation system is only achieved
앫 Update process constitutes a health hazard and could lead
with up-to-date map software. Information
to loss of consciousness or even death.
on new map software versions is available i The update process may take between 60
from an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. and 150 minutes, depending on the size of the
map software.
You can have the map software updated
If possible, perform the update when the vehicle
there by means of a DVD or perform the
is stationary. The DVD read speed is faster when
update process yourself. the vehicle is stationary than when the vehicle is
Notes on DVD Discs moving and the update therefore takes less time.
If you perform the update with the engine off and
앫 Only touch the discs at the edges. the vehicle battery is no longer powerful enough,
COMAND may shut off automatically during the
앫 Handle the discs with care in order to
process to protect the battery. In this case, re-
prevent reading errors. start the update with the engine running.
앫 Avoid scratching, leaving fingerprints You can interrupt the update process and contin-
and dust on the discs. ue it at a later time. If you cancel the update pro-
cess, the navigation system is not ready for
앫 Use a commercially available cleaning
operation.
cloth to clean discs. Always wipe in a
straight line from the inside outwards,
never in a circular motion.
앫 After use, put the discs back into the
box.
앫 Protect the discs from heat and direct
sunlight.

47
Navigation
Introduction
Loading DVD into DVD Changer 왘 Press the Load button . Update Process
The 6-disc DVD changer is integrated with A disc icon indicates which magazine The update process starts once the DVD
COMAND. compartments are currently loaded. has been loaded.
왘 To select an empty magazine com- COMAND checks whether the map soft-
partment: Press ( or &. ware on the DVD matches the vehicle’s
navigation system and system software.
왘 To start loading: Press C.
The message Please Insert Disc <x> will Map software is not suitable for the
then be displayed. navigation system or the system soft-
ware
왘 Insert the disc into the slot with the
printed side upwards. A message is displayed stating that the
navigation update DVD with the new map
1 Load/Eject button The DVD changer pulls in the disc. The
data is not suitable for the system or the
2 Disc slot message Loading Disc <x>... will be dis-
system software.
played.
i If the magazine is full, you will first need to COMAND ejects the DVD.
eject a disc (컄 page 152). 왘 Remove the DVD from the slot.
왘 Have the system software updated by
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i It will only be possible to update the map
software once the system software has been up-
dated.

Map software matches the navigation

system and the current system software
COMAND checks whether the DVD’s map
data has already been installed.

48
 Navigation
Introduction
Map data is already installed You cannot eject the DVD during the up- An unsuccessful update may be caused by
The version release and a corresponding date. If you switch COMAND off during the one of the following:
message will be given on the display. update, this will interrupt the update and 앫 DVD dirty or scratched.
the update will resume at the point of inter-
왘 To confirm message: Press C. ruption when the system is restarted. 왘 Clean the DVD.
COMAND ejects the DVD. While updating, COMAND may prompt you Please refer to the “Notes on DVD
to change the DVD. A corresponding mes- Discs” section (컄 page 47).
Map data is not yet installed
sage is then displayed. 왘 Restart the update.
The version release and a query as to
왘 Press the Eject button. 앫 Overheating as a result of excessively
whether the update should be carried out
will be given on the display. COMAND ejects the DVD. high temperatures in the passenger
compartment.
왘 Select Yes or No. 왘 Remove the DVD from the slot.
왘 Wait until the passenger compart-
If No is selected, COMAND ejects the 왘 Insert the DVD requested by COMAND. ment has cooled down.
DVD automatically and the map data is If the update has been completed suc- 왘 Restart the update.
not updated. cessfully, a corresponding message is
displayed. 앫 The memory medium (hard drive) inte-
왘 Remove the DVD from the slot.
grated into COMAND has a physical de-
If Yes is selected, the map data is updat- 왘 To confirm message: Press C. fect.
ed. COMAND ejects the DVD. 왘 Contact an authorized
Updating the map data 왘 Remove the DVD from the slot. Mercedes-Benz Center.
While the update is in progress, a corre- The update is complete.
sponding message and a progress bar are If the update has not been completed suc-
displayed. The progress bar fills from left cessfully, a message is displayed indicat-
to right over the course of the update. The ing that the map update is not possible.
navigation system is not functional until
왘 To confirm message: Press C.
the update is complete.
COMAND ejects the DVD.
왘 Remove the DVD from the slot.

49
Navigation
Introduction
GPS Reception 앫 COMAND does not issue any naviga-
General Information
tion announcements.
Operational Readiness of the Naviga- The correct functioning of the navigation
system is also dependent on the GPS re- 앫 The message Off Mapped Road and a direc-
tion System after the System Software tion arrow are displayed instead of the
Update ception. In certain situations, the GPS re-
ception may be impaired, distorted or even route guidance displays. The arrow in-
Sometimes the installed map software is impossible, e.g. in tunnels, multi-storey dicates the direction of the destination.
no longer compatible following a system car parks or due to snow on the GPS anten- i Direction arrow accuracy is also dependant
software update by an authorized na. If there is snow on the GPS antenna, on correct vehicle position and/or direction.
Mercedes-Benz Center. In this case, the you should remove it. The GPS antenna is Once the position finding operation has
navigation system is not operational. at the rear on the vehicle’s roof. been completed, route guidance takes
왘 To update map software: Proceed as place again via navigation announcements
Route Guidance after Vehicle Transport
described in the “Update Process” sec- and route guidance displays.
tion (컄 page 48). Use map software After vehicle transport (e.g. by ferry, car
compatible with the system software. train or by towing) COMAND must deter- Interrupting Journey during Route Guid-
mine the vehicle location again. ance
i Please note that in this case the update
must run through right to the end. If you cancel Position finding takes place automatically i An interruption in the journey means parking
beforehand, the navigation system will still not when the vehicle is driven off again. The the vehicle and switching off COMAND.
be ready for operation. actual length of time may vary from case to The continuation of the journey means switching
After start-up or initial start-up, the naviga- case. COMAND on again and continuing to drive.
tion system must perform a position find- While the vehicle is determining its posi- If you interrupt the journey during route
ing operation. As a result, you may have to tion, route guidance is subject to the fol- guidance and continue it later, the follow-
drive for some time until precise route lowing restrictions: ing applies:
guidance takes place. 앫 If you continue the journey within
앫 Navigation announcements, route
guidance displays and displayed street 2 hours, COMAND automatically con-
names do not match the actual loca- tinues route guidance.
tion.

50
 Navigation
Introduction
앫 If you continue the journey after Measurement Units Input Restriction
2 hours, route guidance is cancelled.
You will have to continue the cancelled The measurement units displayed in navi- There is an input restriction for vehicles for
route guidance again manually gation mode are identical to those set in certain countries.
(컄 page 90). the instrument cluster. The restriction is active for vehicle speeds
above apprx. 3 mph. The restriction is de-
Hard Disk Drive activated as soon as the speed falls below
COMAND has an integrated hard drive on apprx. 2 mph.
which the map software is stored. Certain entries cannot be made when the
If an area of the hard drive has a fault, restriction is active, e.g. a city or road en-
COMAND can no longer access the map try.
data in that area for the route calculation, This is indicated by the fact that certain
for example. menu items cannot be selected.
The message Navigation Unavailable will then
be displayed.
왘 To delete message: Switch COMAND
off and back on again.
i After switching on/off, the navigation sys-
tem will remain functional until it has to access
the faulty area of the hard drive again. The mes-
sage will be displayed again.
Contact a Mercedes-Benz service center.

51
Navigation
Introduction
Menu Overview

Navi
Selecting map display
Setting route calculation mode
Setting Block Area
Save Off-road Route
Selecting information on map
Switching highway information on/off

Navi Submenus

Guide Traffic Route (with active Position 6 (with active Destination

route guidance) route guidance)
Selecting POI in Displaying Traf- Opening detour Save vehicle loca- Repeating cur- Cancel route guidance
depicted map fic messages function tion or crosshairs rent navigation Entering destination
segment, if avail- Having alternative position announcement
able 앫 via address
route calculated Display vehicle
position map 앫 from memory
Opening destina-
tion information Display destina- 앫 from “Last destinations”
tion position map memory
Opening route
browser Compass func- 앫 as POI
tion 앫 via map
앫 as stopover destination
Saving destination

52
 Navigation
Introduction
Switching to Navigation Mode Setting the Map Scale
왘 Press the function button .. 왘 To set the map scale: Press Í
or or Ì.
왘 Select Navi in the main function menu. The map scale is displayed.
This displays the map with the menu 왘 To enlarge the map: Press Í.
system either displayed or hidden. 왘 To reduce the map: Press Ì
i If the message Please insert the map DVD to
activate Navigation. appears instead of the map
display, see (컄 page 50).
Map without activated route guidance and
with menu system hidden
1 Current vehicle location
2 Set map orientation (컄 page 55)
3 Set map scale (컄 page 53)
Displaying/Hiding Menu System
왘 To hide: Press $ or % and when
1 Scale
the menu item Full Screen is displayed
2 Pointer indicating the currently set
press C.
map scale
Map without activated route guidance and The menu system is hidden. This dis- 3 Currently set map scale as number
with menu system displayed plays the map in full screen mode.
1 Menu system, status line 왘 To display: In full-screen map mode
2 Menu system, with main functions press C.
3 Current vehicle location or
4 Menu system, navigation submenu
왘 Press the function button ..

53
Navigation
Introduction
Saving current Vehicle Location as Des- COMAND saves the crosshairs position
tination in the last Destinations as a destination in the last destinations
memory (컄 page 101). A window ap-
왘 To display menu system if applica- pears containing a corresponding mes-
ble: Press C. sage.
왘 To save: Select Position £ Save Vehicle
Position. Hiding crosshairs
COMAND saves the current vehicle lo- 왘 Press the í button.
cation as a destination in the last desti- The crosshairs disappear and the map
nations memory (컄 page 101). A is set to the vehicle location.
window appears containing a corre- 1 Current vehicle location or
sponding message. 2 Crosshairs
왘 Set the map to the vehicle location, see
3 Information on crosshairs position
Scrolling the Map description below.
4 Set map scale
i You can scroll the map only when the menu i The display 3 may for example be a road if
system is hidden (map in full-screen mode). corresponding data is available in the digital map
왘 Hide menu system if applicable and “Current Street” is activated. Or it displays
(컄 page 53). the geo-coordinate position of the crosshairs if
“Geo-coordinates” display is activated.
왘 Press %, $, ( or &. (컄 page 60).
Crosshairs will appear on the map.
Saving crosshairs position as destina-
tion in the last destinations
왘 To display menu system if applica-
ble: Press C.
왘 To save: Select Position £ Save Cross-
hair Position.

54
 Navigation
Introduction
Setting Map to Vehicle or Destination 앫 8 = Bird’s-eye view (the map display is
Basic Settings
Location oriented in the direction of travel, the
i You can perform the settings listed below map projection reproduces the curva-
i If you have moved the map, you can quickly with route guidance inactive or active.
ture of the earth’s surface, the orange
move the map to the vehicle or destination loca-
Map Display tip of the symbol points northwards)
tion using this function. It is possible to set it to
the destination location only when route guid-
ance is active. Map orientation
왘 To Display Menu System if Applica-
ble: Press C.
왘 To set map to vehicle location:
Select Position £ Vehicle Position Map.
or
왘 Press the í button if the crosshairs
are displayed. 1 Currently set map orientation
i This hides the crosshairs. The following displays are possible: Example of map from bird’s-eye view
왘 To set to destination location: Select 앫 9 = orientation to north (the map dis- 1 Current crosshairs location
Position £ Destination Position Map. play is oriented to the north, north is al- 2 Currently set map orientation
ways at the top)
The crosshairs position is then set to 왘 To set map orientation: Display menu
the destination. 앫 8 = Driving direction (the map display system if applicable (컄 page 53).
is oriented in the direction of travel, the
direction of travel is always at the top, 왘 Select Navi £ Map Display.
the orange tip of the symbol points A dotRindicates the current setting.
northwards)

컄컄

55
Navigation
Introduction
The following settings are available: 왘 Hide menu system if applicable
앫 Standard Symbols (컄 page 53).
Displays the factory-set symbols Route Mode
앫 Personal Symbols
You can choose the symbols yourself. This functions allows you to set the follow-
ing options for route guidance:
앫 No Symbols
앫 Avoid Highways
왘 To set: Display menu system if applica-
앫 Avoid Toll Roads
ble (컄 page 53).
앫 Avoid Tunnels
왘 Select Navi £ Map Display. 앫 Avoid Ferries
1 Options for map orientation 왘 Select Standard Symbols or Personal Symbols 앫 Avoid AutoTrains
2 Options for POI symbols (컄 page 56) or No Symbols.
왘 Select North Up or Heading Up or Bird‘s-eye If you have selected “Personal Sym-
View. bols”, the list of POIs will be displayed.
왘 To exit menu: Press ( or &. 왘 To switch symbol display on/off:
왘 Hide menu system if applicable Select the corresponding POI.
(컄 page 53). Depending on the previous status,
The map orientation changes accord- the corresponding symbol displays
ingly. will be switched on D or off C.
You may also activate the symbol
Setting POI Symbols displays for several POIs.
You can select which POIs are to be dis- i The list indicates all symbols for all coun- 1 Sets route options
played as symbols on the map. Points of in- tries that are contained in the digital map. How-
terest include, for example, gas stations, ever, not all POIs are available in all countries. As
hotels, cinemas and restaurants. a result, certain POI symbols may not be shown
on the map even though the symbol display is
switched on.
왘 To exit menu: Press ( or &.

56
 Navigation
Introduction
Setting Route Options 왘 Select Navi £ Block Area. 왘 Press Í or Ì to change the size
왘 To set: Display menu system if applica- If no areas were previously set, the of the blocked area.
ble (컄 page 53). map display appears ready to select 왘 Press C.
왘 Select Navi £ Mode. an area. The area is added to the blocked area
왘 To switch option on/off: Select re- If areas were previously set, the list.
quired option. blocked area list appears.
왘 To move the map: Press %, $,
Depending on the previous status, the
option will be switched on D or off C. ( or &.
You may activate several options. 왘 To set the map scale: Press Í
i The calculated route may include ferry con- or Ì.
nections, for example, even if the option “Avoid The map scale is displayed.
ferries” has been activated.
왘 To enlarge the map: Press Í.
i If you change the route type setting when
왘 To reduce the map: Press Ì
route guidance is active, COMAND calculates a
new route. 왘 To set the blocked area: Press C.
A checked entry indicates an active
Block Area blocked area.
You can define an area within the map dis- i You can block several areas for the route
play that is not to be used by the system in calculation and activate or de-activate them by
calculating a route, if possible. setting or removing the check mark.
i The calculated route may include a blocked Displaying and Changing an Existing
area if the destination is within a blocked area or Block Area
if the destination can only be reached using
roads that lead through a blocked area. High- 왘 To select the area you want to dis-
ways cannot be blocked. play or change: Press % or $.
왘 To set, change or delete: Display 왘 Select Display/Change.
The blocked area appears in red. 컄컄
menu system if applicable (컄 page 53).

57
Navigation
Introduction
The map display appears with the block Deleting a Block Area
area marked red. 왘 To select the area you want to de-
왘 Press Ì or Í until the desired lete: Press % or $.
size of the block area is set. 왘 Select Options£Delete.
왘 Press %, $, ( or & to You will be prompted to confirm that
shift the block area to the desired re- you wish to delete the block area.
gion.
왘 Select Yes or No.
왘 To confirm the area and exit map
display: Press C. If you select Yes COMAND deletes the
entry. A message will be displayed.
왘 Hide menu system if applicable
(컄 page 53). Saving a Off-road Route Displaying Memory Usage
i When the memory is 90% full, you see a
Defining a New Block Area If this function is switched on, an Off-road message to this effect. When the memory is full,
왘 Select Avoid New Area. route is recorded and stored. the function is no longer available and a message
appears.
The map display appears with a default Switching the Function On/Off
new block area in red. 왘 To confirm the message:
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary
Press the C button.
왘 Press Ì or Í until the desired (컄 page 53).
size of the new block area is set. i In order to be able to continue using the
왘 Select Navi£Save Off-road Route. "Record route" function, you should delete the
왘 Press % or $, ( or & to 왘 Select Save Off-road Route in the sub- route memory afterwards.
shift the new block area to the desired menu.
region. 왘 Show the menu system, if necessary
Depending on the previous state, (컄 page 53).
왘 To confirm the area and exit map switch the option on Ç or off c.
display: Press C. 왘 Select Navi£Save Off-road Route£Off-
road Route Memory.
왘 Hide menu system if applicable
(컄 page 53).

58
 Navigation
Introduction
Information on Map Time of Arrival/Distance to Destination
You can have map information displayed at
the bottom edge of the screen during route
guidance.
왘 To set: Display menu system if applica-
ble (컄 page 53).
왘 Select Navi£Information On Map.
Map with display activated for time of
arrival/distance
A bar shows the memory usage as a 1 Symbol for destination
percentage. 2 Distance to the destination
3 Symbol for estimated time of arrival
i When the memory is completely full, you 4 Estimated time of arrival
cannot select the Route memory menu item.
i This display can only be seen during route
Deleting the Route Memory guidance. In the “Move map” function you will
왘 Show the menu system, if necessary see other data depending on the crosshairs posi-
tion, for example a street name if the digital map
(컄 page 53).
supports this data.
왘 Select Navi£Save Off-road Route£ A dotR indicates the current setting.
Off-road Route Memory£Delete Off-road 왘 Select Arrival Time / Distance or Current
Route Memory. Street or Geo-coordinates or None.
A query appears asking whether the mem- 왘 To exit menu: Press ( or &.
ory should be deleted.
왘 Hide menu system if applicable
왘 Select Yes or No. (컄 page 53).
If you select Yes, the memory is deleted.

59
Navigation
Introduction
Current Street i Adequate GPS reception must be available 왘 To set: Display menu system if applica-
for all displays. The altitude display 1 may differ ble (컄 page 53).
from reality because the navigation system cal-
culates it using the GPS signals.
왘 Select Navi £ Highway Information.
i In the “Move map” function the displays 1 Depending on the previous status, the
and 4 are not displayed. The geo-coordinate function will be switched off C or on D.
position of the crosshairs is displayed.

“None” Menu Option

Map with road display activated
1 Road name or road number, e.g. for
highways
Geo-coordinates Display

Map with display switched off

Example display: Function on
1 Currently set map orientation
1 Information type: Rest area
i In the “Move map” function you will see oth- 2 Name of rest area
er data depending on the crosshairs position, for 3 Distance from the current vehicle loca-
Map with geo-coordinates display activated example a road name if the digital map supports tion
this data.
1 Current height above sea level
2 Coordinates display of the current vehi- Highway Information
cle location (latitude)
3 Coordinates display of the current vehi- When driving on highways, you can have
cle location (longitude) the next gas stations, service areas, etc. as
4 Number of GPS satellites currently be- well as the distance to them displayed in
ing used the right-hand half of the screen.

60
 Navigation
Introduction
Compass Function i In order to display the height 2 the recep-
tion of at least four GPS satellites is necessary.
You can display a compass representation
of the current vehicle position and direc-
tion.
왘 Select Position£Compass.

1 Current vehicle direction

2 Current height above sea level
(rounded to 100 ft)
3 Current vehicle position: longitude
4 Number of GPS satellites in use
5 Current vehicle position: latitude
6 Current steering angle of front wheels

61
Navigation
Destination Input
Destination Input Entering a Destination via the Ad-
dress
Introduction to Destination Input
i In some countries, it is not possible to enter
G Warning addresses at vehicle speeds above apprx.
3 mph. The function becomes available again as
For safety reasons, only enter a new desti- soon as the speed falls below apprx. 2 mph.
nation when the vehicle is stationary. i Set the system language (컄 page 38).
i You can enter a destination, regardless of The following options are available for en-
whether or not route guidance is active. tering a destination via an address:
앫 Entering state/province, city/zip code Enter Destination menu
The following destination input options are
available: and street
Menu Items in Enter Destination Menu
앫 Entering state/province, city and city
앫 Entering a destination via the address
center Some menu items are not available or not
앫 Entering a destination from the desti- yet available, depending on the letters en-
nation memory 앫 Entering state/province, city/zip code,
street and house number tered for the address or the data for the
앫 Entering destination from the last des- digital map.
앫 Entering state/province, city/zip code,
tinations Example:
street and junction
앫 Entering a POI After the state/province has been select-
Route calculation can then be started ed the menu items, No., Center, Intersection,
앫 Entering a destination via the map (컄 page 70). Save and Start are not yet available. Or the
앫 Entering a stopover destination ZIP menu item is not available if the digital
Opening Enter Destination Menu
앫 Entering a destination via “Search and map does not contain any zip codes.
Send” (컄 page 256). 왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
and display menu system (컄 page 53).
왘 Select Destination £ Address Entry.
The Enter Destination menu appears.

62
 Navigation
Destination Input
Selecting a State/Province Entering a City City list with predictive speller
i You can only select those states/provinces i You can only enter those cities that are If this list is given in the display, the
that are stored in the digital map. stored in the digital map. Any zip code that has predictive speller 8 is activated automat-
already been entered is deleted when a city is ically.
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select
entered.
State.
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select
A menu appears where you can choose
City.
one of the following lists:
The city list is displayed with or without
앫 Last States / Provinces,
predictive speller (컄 page 65). The dis-
앫 States (U.S.A.) or play of the predictive speller depends
앫 Provinces (Canada). on how many cities are available for the
selected state/province.
왘 To select a list: Press % or $.
왘 Press C.
The selected state/province list ap- 1 Characters entered by the user
pears. 2 Characters automatically added by the
system
왘 To select a state/province: Press
3 List entry that best matches the
% or $.
characters already entered
왘 Press C. 4 Switches to list without speller
The Enter Destination appears again. 5 Press and hold deletes complete entry,
The selected state/province has been press briefly deletes last character
entered automatically. 6 Currently unavailable characters
7 Currently available characters
8 Predictive speller
9 Currently selected character
a Cancels an entry
b List

63
Navigation
Destination Input
i In the predictive speller 8 you can only se- After you have pressed it the first time, Deleting an entry
lect characters 7 that are currently available. the character display appears at the 왘 To delete individual characters: Se-
The characters that are available depends on lower edge of the display. The first lect õ at the bottom right of the
those already entered and the data for the digital available letter is highlighted. speller and press C.
map.
or
When entering characters, the list entry 3
always displays a city that best matches 왘 Press the î button.
the characters already entered. 왘 To delete an entire entry:
COMAND automatically adds matching let- Select õ and press and hold C un-
ters 2 to those characters 1 already en- til the entire entry has been deleted.
tered by the user. or
Entering characters 왘 Press and hold î until the entire en-
왘 To select characters: Press ( or try has been deleted.
&. Cancelling an entry
You see which characters you can enter
왘 Press % or $ to switch between with that key. Each time you press the key, 왘 Select A at the bottom left of the
the lines in the speller. the next character is highlighted. speller and press C.
왘 To confirm character selection: For example, key 2: or
Press C.
앫 Press once = A 왘 Press the í button.
Alternatively, you can enter characters us-
앫 Press twice = B The Enter Destination menu appears.
ing the number keypad (direct input).
앫 Press three times = C
Example:
Wait until the character display goes out.
왘 Press one of the number keys, e.g.
2, once or repeatedly in succes-
sion.

64
 Navigation
Destination Input
Accepting first list entry City list without predictive speller Entering a Zip Code
왘 Press and hold C until the i You can only enter those zip codes that are
Enter Destination menu appears. stored in the digital map. For some countries it is
Here you will find the accepted list not possible to enter any zip code.
entry. 왘 In the Enter Destination menu
or (컄 page 62) select ZIP.
If COMAND can match the characters en- The zip code list is displayed with or
tered definitively to one city, the Enter without predictive speller (컄 page 66).
Destination menu appears automatically The display of the predictive speller de-
with the selected list entry. pends on how many zip codes are avail-
able for the selected state/province.
Switching to the city list without predic- 왘 To select a city: Press % or $.
tive speller 왘 To cancel selection: Select Back and Zip code list with predictive speller
If other entries for a city exist, or the name press C. If this list is given in the display, the
exists more than once in the system, then or predictive speller 9 is activated automat-
B is highlighted in the speller. ically.
왘 Press the í button.
왘 Press C.
왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
You can switch to the list at any point while
The Enter Destination menu appears
entering characters.
again in the display.
왘 Press $ repeatedly until the list ap- COMAND has accepted the selected
pears without the speller. city and entered it automatically in the
or Enter Destination menu.
왘 Select B and press C.

컄컄

65
Navigation
Destination Input
When entering a digit, the list entry 3 al- Switching to the zip code list without
ways displays a zip code that best matches predictive speller
the characters already entered. COMAND You can switch to the list at any point while
automatically adds matching digits 2 to entering characters.
those digits 1 already entered by the us-
er. 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the list ap-
pears without the speller.
왘 For the steps of
or
앫 Entering characters
왘 Select B and press C.
앫 Deleting an entry
1 Numbers entered by the user 앫 Accepting first list entry ZIP code list without predictive speller
2 Numbers automatically added by the 앫 Cancelling an entry
system
앫 Switching to the list without predic-
3 List entry that best matches the
characters already entered tive speller
4 Switches to list without speller proceed as described under “City list with
5 Press and hold deletes complete entry, predictive speller” (컄 page 63).
press briefly deletes last character
6 Currently available digits or
7 Currently selected digit If COMAND can match the characters en-
8 Currently unavailable digit tered definitively to one city, the Enter
9 Predictive speller Destination menu appears automatically
왘 To select a zip code: Press % or
a Cancels entry with the selected list entry.
b List $.
i In the predictive speller 9 you can only se- 왘 To cancel selection: Select Back and
lect digits that are currently available. The char- press C.
acters that are available depends on those or
already entered and the data for the digital map.
왘 Press the í button.

66
 Navigation
Destination Input
왘 To confirm selection: Press C. Entering a Street
If COMAND can assign the zip code to i Any city center that has already been en-
a unique address, the Enter Destination tered is deleted when a street is entered. You
menu is displayed again. The address can only enter those streets that are stored in
data has been entered automatically. the digital map.
Now you can start the route calculation
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select
(컄 page 70).
Street.
If COMAND is unable to assign the zip
The street list is displayed with or
code to a unique address, the Enter
without predictive speller (컄 page 68).
Destination menu is also displayed
The display of the predictive speller de- 1 List entry that best matches the
again. The zip code has been entered
pends on how many streets are avail- characters already entered
automatically. To further limit the
able for the selected city, state or 2 Predictive speller
choice, you can now enter the street
province.
(컄 page 67). When entering the street, i In the predictive speller 2 you can only se-
only those streets within the area of Street list with predictive speller lect characters that are currently available. The
the entered zip code are available. characters that are available depends on those
If this list is given in the display, the
already entered and the data for the digital map.
predictive speller 2 is activated automat-
ically. 왘 For the steps of
앫 Entering characters
앫 Deleting an entry
앫 Accepting first list entry
앫 Cancelling an entry
앫 Switching to the list without predic-
tive speller
proceed as described under “City list
with predictive speller” (컄 page 63).

67
Navigation
Destination Input
Street list without predictive speller Entering a City Center After the confirmation, the Enter Desti-
nation menu appears again. COMAND
i You can only enter those city centers that has accepted the selected city center
are stored in the digital map.
and entered it automatically in the En-
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select ter Destination menu.
Center.
Now you can start the route calculation
The city center list is displayed. (컄 page 70).
Entering a House Number
i It is not possible to enter house numbers un-
til the street has been entered. You can only en-
왘 To select a street: Press % or ter those house numbers that are stored in the
digital map. The digital map does not contain all
$.
house numbers for all streets.
왘 To cancel selection: Select Back and
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select
press C.
No..
or
The house number list is displayed with
왘 Press the í button. 왘 To select a city center: Press % or (컄 page 68) or without predictive spell-
왘 To confirm selection: Press C. $. er (컄 page 69). The display of the
왘 To cancel selection: Select Back and predictive speller depends on how
The Enter Destination menu appears many house numbers are available for
again. COMAND has accepted the se- press C.
the selected street.
lected street and entered it automati- or
cally in the Enter Destination menu. House number list with predictive spell-
왘 Press the í button.
Now you can start the route calculation er
왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
(컄 page 70). If this list is displayed, the predictive spell-
er 3 is activated automatically.

68
 Navigation
Destination Input
proceed as described under proceed 왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
as described under “City list with After the confirmation, the Enter Desti-
predictive speller” (컄 page 63). nation menu appears again. COMAND
House number list without predictive has accepted the selected house num-
speller ber and entered it automatically in the
Enter Destination menu.
Now you can start the route calculation
(컄 page 70).
Entering a Junction
1 List entry that best matches the i A junction can be entered once you have en-
characters already entered tered a street (컄 page 67). You can only enter
2 List those junctions that are stored in the digital map.
3 Predictive speller
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select
i In the predictive speller 3 you can only se- Intersection.
lect digits that are currently available. The char-
acters that are available depends on those 왘 To select house number: Press % The junction list is displayed with or
already entered and the data for the digital map. or $. without predictive speller (컄 page 70).
왘 To cancel selection: Select Back and The display of the predictive speller de-
왘 For the steps of
press C. pends on how many junctions are avail-
앫 Entering digits able for the selected street.
or
앫 Deleting an entry
왘 Press the í button. Junction list with predictive speller
앫 Accepting first list entry
If this list is given in the display, the
앫 Cancelling an entry predictive speller 3 is activated automat-
앫 Switching to the list without predic- ically.
tive speller

컄컄

69
Navigation
Destination Input
Junction list without predictive speller Starting Route Calculation
i Route calculation can only be started once
all the necessary address data has been en-
tered.
왘 In the Enter Destination menu select
Start.

1 List entry that best matches the

characters already entered 왘 To select a junction: Press % or
2 List $.
3 Predictive speller
왘 To cancel selection: Select Back and
i In the predictive speller 3 you can only se- press C.
lect characters that are currently available. The
characters that are available depends on those or
already entered and the data for the digital map. 왘 Press the í button. 1 Destination
왘 For the steps of 왘 To confirm selection: Press C. 2 Starts route calculation and then starts
앫 Entering characters route guidance
After the confirmation, the Enter Desti-
앫 Deleting an entry nation menu appears again. COMAND If route guidance is not active yet, the
has accepted the selected junction and route calculation is started.
앫 Accepting first list entry
entered it automatically in the Enter If route guidance is already active, you
앫 Cancelling an entry Destination menu. Now you can start will be prompted to confirm that route
앫 Switching to the list without predic- the route calculation (컄 page 70). guidance should be ended.
tive speller 왘 Select Yes or No.
proceed as described under “City list
with predictive speller” (컄 page 63).

70
 Navigation
Destination Input
If you select Yes COMAND cancels Entering a Destination from the Des- Destination Memory List with
route guidance and starts the route cal- Predictive Speller
tination Memory
culation to the newly entered destina-
tion. 왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode If this list is given in the display, the
and display menu system (컄 page 53). predictive speller 4 is activated automat-
If you select No COMAND resumes the ically.
active route guidance. 왘 Select Destination £ From Memory.
During the route calculation, an arrow If there are more than 8 entries in the
points towards the destination, and un- destination memory, the destination
derneath the message Calculating Rou- memory list with predictive speller
te..., for example, is displayed. (컄 page 71) is displayed, otherwise the
Route guidance begins after the route destination memory list is displayed
has been calculated (컄 page 84). without predictive speller (컄 page 72).
i Route calculation takes some time. The i There is always an entry in the destination
length of time depends on, e.g. distance to the memory with the name My Address. You can as-
destination. COMAND calculates the route using sign your home address, for example, to this en-
the digital map data. The calculated route may try and select it for route guidance (컄 page 96).
deviate from the actual road situation, e.g. as a This entry is at the top of the list in the destina- 1 Character entered by the user
result of road works or incomplete map data. tion memory. 2 Characters added by the system
Please refer to the information on the digital map 3 List entry that best matches the
(컄 page 47). characters already entered
4 Switches to list without speller
5 Press and hold deletes complete entry,
press briefly deletes last character
6 Currently unavailable characters
7 Currently available characters
8 Predictive speller
9 Currently selected character
a Cancels an entry
b Destination memory list

71
Navigation
Destination Input
i In the predictive speller 8 you can only se- Switching to the destination memory list Destination Memory List without
lect characters that are currently available. The without predictive speller Predictive Speller
characters that are available depends on those If there are several entries in the destina-
already entered and the content of the destina- tion that have similar spellings, B is high-
tion memory. lighted in the speller.
When entering characters, the list entry 3 왘 Press C.
always displays a city that best matches
the characters already entered. COMAND You can switch to the list at any point while
automatically adds matching letters 3 to entering characters.
those characters 2 already entered by the 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the list ap-
user. pears without the speller.
For the steps of or
앫 Entering characters 왘 Select B and press C. 왘 To select a destination: Press %
앫 Deleting an entry If COMAND can match the characters en- or $.
앫 Accepting first list entry tered definitively to one entry, the list ap- 왘 To cancel selection: Press the í
pears automatically without the predictive button.
앫 Cancelling an entry speller. or
앫 Switching to the list without predic-
tive speller 왘 Select Back and press C.
proceed as described under “City list 왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
with predictive speller” (컄 page 63). 왘 To start route calculation: Select
Start, see also (컄 page 70).

72
 Navigation
Destination Input
Entering Destination from the last Entering Destination via the Map
Destinations i In some countries, entering destinations via
왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode the map is not possible at vehicle speeds above
and display menu system (컄 page 53). apprx. 3 mph. The function becomes available
again as soon as the speed falls below apprx.
왘 Select Destination £ From Last Destinati- 2 mph.
ons. Using the destination entry via the map, you can
also enter a destination that lies within the digital
map but whose address data is not included in
the digital map.

Opening the map 1 Current vehicle location

2 Crosshairs
왘 If at least a city has been entered, se- 3 Information on crosshairs position
lect Map in the Enter Destination menu 4 Set map scale
(컄 page 62).
i The display 3 depends on the setting se-
or lected in “Information On Map” (컄 page 59). It
왘 If necessary display the menu system may display the current road if corresponding
in the map display (컄 page 53). data is available in the digital map. Or it displays
1 Last destination the geo-coordinate position of the crosshairs if
왘 To select a destination: Press % 왘 Select Destination £ Using Map. Geo-coordinates display is activated (컄 page 60)
or $. In both cases, the map together with and if there is adequate GPS reception.
왘 To confirm selection: Press C. crosshairs appears.
왘 To start route calculation: Select
Start, see also (컄 page 70).
i For more information on the “Last destina-
tions” memory go to (컄 page 101).

73
Navigation
Destination Input
Moving the Map and Selecting a Desti- If the destination is within the digital Entering Stopover Destination
nation map, COMAND tries to find the desti-
nation on the map. i If route guidance is active, you can enter a
왘 To move the map: Press %, $, stopover destination. Stopover destinations may
( or &. If the destination can be found, the En- be predefined destinations in the following cate-
ter Destination menu is displayed with gories suggested by COMAND for you to select:
왘 To set the map scale: Press Í the address of the destination. Other- 앫 ATM/Cash
or Ì. wise you will see the entry Destination
The map scale is displayed. From Map. 앫 Hospital
앫 Gas Station
왘 To enlarge the map: Press Í. 왘 To start route calculation: Select
Start, see also (컄 page 70). 앫 Parking Lot
왘 To reduce the map: Press Ì
앫 Restaurant
왘 To select a destination: Press C
once or repeatedly until you get a list of However, you can also enter destinations other
destinations if available. than those that have been predefined. Select the
menu item OTHER for this purpose.
You can influence the route guidance to the main
destination in a specific way using the stopover
function. Once the stopover destination has
been reached, COMAND automatically recalcu-
lates the route to the main destination.

Entering predefined Destinations

왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
and display menu system (컄 page 53).
왘 Select Destination £ Stopover.
왘 To select a destination: Press %
or $.
왘 Press C.

74
 Navigation
Destination Input
No stopover destination available yet Here you will find the stopover destina- Entering another Destination as Stop-
왘 Select a category. tions in the selected category, sorted over Destination
by increasing distance from the current
vehicle location. 왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
A stopover destination exists
and display menu system (컄 page 53).
왘 To change: Select Change Stopover. The list shows:
왘 Select Destination £ Stopover.
왘 Select a category. 앫 Name
왘 To enter: Select OTHER.
왘 Select another stopover destination 앫 Information on the location of the
stopover destination in relation to Choose from:
Selecting a predefined category the direction of travel and the 앫 Address Entry
COMAND first searches for destinations 앫 Current distance to the stopover 앫 From Memory
along the route within the selected catego- destination. 앫 From Last Destinations
ry. COMAND then searches for destina-
왘 To choose a destination: Press %
tions in the vicinity of the vehicle’s 앫 From POIs
location. or $.
왘 Select a menu item.
왘 To select a destination: Press C.
If COMAND is unable to find any destina- The rest of the destination entry will vary
tions, a message to that effect will be dis- The Enter Destination menu appears depending on the selection made:
played. and displays the address of the desti-
nation. For the Address Entry option see:
왘 Select OK.
왘 To cancel selection: Select Back. 왘 Entering a Destination via the Address
왘 If necessary, select another category. (컄 page 62).
왘 To start route calculation: Select
If COMAND finds destinations, a list is For the From Memory option see:
Start, see also (컄 page 70).
displayed in the right-hand part of the
왘 Entering a Destination from the Desti-
screen.
nation Memory (컄 page 71).

컄컄

75
Navigation
Destination Input
For the From Last Destinations option see:
왘 Entering Destination from the last Des-
tinations (컄 page 73).
For the From POIs option see:
왘 Entering a POI (컄 page 77).
왘 To start route calculation: After en-
tering the destination select Start, see
also (컄 page 70).
Deleting Stopover Destination
An existing stopover destination can be de-
leted.
왘 Switch to navigation mode if neces-
sary.
왘 Select Destination £ Stopover £ Delete
Stopover.
COMAND deletes the stopover destina-
tion and recalculates the route to the
main destination.

76
 Navigation
POI Input
POI Input Entering a POI in the Vicinity of a Entering a POI via a Name Search
Entering a POI in local Area of Desti-
Specific Location i This function gives you access to all POIs
that are available in the digital map.
nation Option 1
왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
i It is only possible to enter a POI in the local 왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
area of the destination when route guidance is tem displayed (컄 page 53) select
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select
Destination £ From POIs £ Search By Name.
active. Destination £ From POIs £ Other City.
왘 In the map display with the menu sys- This displays a list of all POIs in the dig-
왘 If necessary proceed as described un-
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select ital map and the predictive speller.
der Selecting a State/Province
Destination £ From POIs £ Near Destina- (컄 page 63). 왘 Continue as described in the “POI list
tion. with predictive speller” section
왘 To enter a city: Select City.
왘 Continue by selecting the POI category (컄 page 81).
(컄 page 78). The city input menu appears.
Entering a POI via a Phone Number
왘 Proceed as described in the “Entering a
Entering a POI in the Vicinity of the Search
City” section (컄 page 63).
Location i This function gives you access to all POIs in
왘 After entering the city, continue by se- the digital map stored with a phone number.
왘 In the map display with the menu sys- lecting the POI category (컄 page 78).
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select 왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
Destination £ From POIs £ Current Posi- Option 2 tem displayed (컄 page 53) select
tion. 왘 Enter an address in the Enter Destina- Destination £ From POIs £ Search By Pho-
tion menu (컄 page 62). ne Number.
왘 Continue by selecting the POI category
(컄 page 78). 왘 Select POI. This displays a list of all POIs in the dig-
ital map sorted by phone number and
왘 Continue by selecting the POI category the predictive speller.
(컄 page 78).
왘 Continue as described in the “POI list
with predictive speller” section
(컄 page 81).

77
Navigation
POI Input
앫 POI via phone number:
Choosing a POI Category
A numerically sorted list is available
The categories and POIs available depend
on the area for which you wish to enter a Selecting a Category
POI.
Depending on the number of available cat-
앫 POI in local area of destination: egories, the main category list is displayed
Alphabetically sorted categories and either with or without predictive speller
POIs sorted by distance in the vicinity (컄 page 79).
of the destination location are avail-
able. Main category list with predictive spell-
앫 POI in the vicinity of the location: er
1 Symbol for main category
Alphabetically sorted categories and If this list is given in the display, the 2 Characters entered by the user
POIs sorted by distance in the vicinity predictive speller 7 is activated automat- 3 Characters automatically added by the
of the vehicle location are available. ically. system
앫 POI in a particular city: 4 List entry that best matches the
If you have only entered the country characters already entered
and the city, alphabetically sorted cate- 5 Main category list
gories and alphabetically sorted POIs 6 Currently unavailable characters
within the city limits are available. 7 Predictive speller
8 Currently selected character
If you have entered more than the
9 Currently available character
country and the city, alphabetically
sorted categories and POIs sorted by i In the predictive speller 7 you can only se-
distance in the vicinity of the address lect characters that are currently available. The
entered are available. characters that are available depends on those
already entered and the data for the digital map.
앫 POI via name search:
An alphabetically sorted list of all POIs
is available.

78
 Navigation
POI Input
When entering characters, the list entry 3 왘 Press and hold î until the entire en- Switching to the main category list with-
always displays a category that best try has been deleted. out predictive speller
matches the characters already entered. You can switch to the list at any point while
COMAND automatically adds matching let- Cancelling an entry
entering characters.
ters 3 to those characters 2 already en- 왘 Select Back at the bottom left of the
tered by the user. 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the list ap-
speller and press C.
pears without the speller.
Entering characters or
or
왘 To select characters: Press ( or 왘 Press the í button.
왘 Select B and press C.
&. The previous menu appears.
왘 Press % or $ to switch between Main category list without predictive
Accepting first list entry speller
the lines.
왘 Press and hold C until the list appears
왘 To confirm character selection:
without speller.
Press C.
or
Deleting an entry
If COMAND can match the characters en-
왘 To delete individual characters: Se- tered definitively to one entry, the list ap-
lect õ at the bottom right of the pears automatically without the speller.
speller and press C.
or
왘 Press the î button next to the cur-
sor buttons. Example: Main category list for POIs in the
왘 To delete an entire entry: Select ) vicinity of the location
and press and hold C until the entire 1 Selected main category
entry has been deleted.
or

79
Navigation
POI Input
왘 To select main category: 왘 For the steps of i If ALL TYPES is selected in the list, the POI list
Press % or $. 앫 Entering characters contains all the POIs in all subcategories of the
왘 To cancel selection: Press the í RESTAURANT main category that are located in the
앫 Deleting an entry search radius. The list item OTHER at the end of
button.
앫 Accepting first list entry the list contains all the POIs not assigned to any
왘 To confirm selection: Press C. subcategory in the RESTAURANT main category that
앫 Cancelling an entry
are located in the search radius.
앫 Switching to the list without predic-
The selected main category contains no
tive speller
subcategories:
proceed as described under “Main cat-
Selecting it immediately opens the POI list.
egory list with predictive speller”
The POI list then contains the available
(컄 page 78).
POIs for the main category that are located
The POI list appears. in the search radius.
왘 To select subcategory: Press % or
POI List
$.
왘 To cancel selection: Press the í As an example, the illustration below
1 Calls up all entries in the shows the POI list for the main category of
RESTAURANT main category
button.
RESTAURANT, BREWPUB subcategory in the vicini-
2 Calls up all entries in the BREWPPUB sub- 왘 To confirm selection: Press C. ty of the location.
category After selecting a subcategory you will
3 Predictive speller see the list of POIs. This contains the
i In the predictive speller 3 you can only se- available POIs for the subcategory that
lect characters that are currently available. The are located in the search radius.
characters that are available depends on those
already entered and the data for the digital map.

80
 Navigation
POI Input
Selecting a POI The POI list appears.
왘 Select the desired POI. 왘 To start route calculation: Select Con-
The full address of the selected POI is tinue.
displayed. 왘 Then in the Enter Destination menu se-
i If the selected POI has a telephone book en- lect Start, refer also to (컄 page 70).
try, you can make a call to the POI.
POI list with predictive speller
If you have selected Entering a POI via a Name
Search (컄 page 77), the list of all available
POIs in the digital map is displayed.
1 Direction of destination
2 Air-line distance to the destination
3 Point of interest
4 Selected category or subcategory
Depending on the POI category selected,
COMAND uses different reference points when
determining the distance to the destination:
앫 In the vicinity of the location: The distance to 1 POI with address
the POI from the current vehicle location. 2 Starts route calculation
앫 Local area of destination: The distance to 3 Saves POI as destination
the POI from the destination entered. 4 Shows details of the address
5 Initiates a call, if available 1 First list entry after opening the list
앫 Other area: The distance to the POI in the se- 2 POI list
lected city from the current vehicle location. 6 Cancels selection
7 Displays the map 3 Predictive speller
4 Category symbols
왘 To cancel selection: Press the í
button.
or
왘 Select Back.

81
Navigation
POI Input
i In the predictive speller 3 you can only se- 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the list ap-
lect characters that are currently available. The pears without the speller.
characters that are available depends on those or
already entered and the data for the digital map.
왘 Select B and press C.
왘 For the steps of
The full address of the POI is displayed.
앫 Entering characters
왘 To cancel selection: Press the í
앫 Deleting an entry button.
앫 Accepting first list entry or
앫 Cancelling an entry 왘 Select Back. Affter you have selected the entry with the
proceed as described under “Main cat- The POI list appears. Z symbol the next display includes The
egory list with predictive speller” Zagat ratings.
(컄 page 78). 왘 To start route calculation: Select Con-
tinue.
Selecting a POI 왘 Then in the Enter Destination menu se-
To accept first list entry: lect Start, refer also to (컄 page 70).
왘 Press and hold C until the list appears Dummy
ZAGAT® Rating Service
without speller.
Entries with the Z symbol contain addition-
or al ZAGAT information. ZAGAT is a service
If COMAND can match the characters en- that evaluates restaurants, for example, in
tered definitively to one entry, the address different categories like food, decor, ser-
entry appears automatically (컄 page 81). vice etc., supplies the average price level
You can display the full address of a POI at (cost) and a general description. 1 ZAGAT Ratings
any point while entering characters. 2 Display details
왘 To see description: Select Details.

82
 Navigation
POI Input
Entering a POI via the Map
i If the crosshairs are visible on the map, you
can enter POIs in the vicinity of the crosshairs.
If the crosshairs are not visible, you can enter
POIs in the vicinity of the current vehicle loca-
tion.
왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select Guide.
POIs are available:
ZAGAT example description Depending on the map scale selected, 1 Information about the highlighted POI
POI symbols are displayed on the map. 2 Highlighted POI
The scale starting at which symbols are
왘 To select a POI: Select Next or Previous.
displayed on the map varies from sym-
bol to symbol. 왘 To display details on the selection:
You can select which symbols Select Details.
COMAND should display (컄 page 56). 왘 To start route calculation: Select
The POI nearest to the center of the Start, see also (컄 page 70).
screen is selected automatically.
You will be asked whether the POI
No POIs available: should be adopted as the destination.
A corresponding message is displayed. 왘 Select Yes or No.
i This message is also displayed if the menu Route calculation starts if Yes is select-
item No Symbols under Map Display has been se- ed; a new POI can be chosen if No is se-
lected (컄 page 56). lected.
왘 To confirm message: Press C.

83
Navigation
Route Guidance
Route Guidance COMAND guides you to the destination by Driving Maneuver
means of driving recommendations in the
General Information form of navigation announcements or Driving maneuvers are given in three phas-
route guidance displays. es:
G Warning i The route guidance displays only appear if 앫 Preparation phase
COMAND calculates the route to the desti- the display has been switched to navigation 앫 Announcement phase
nation without taking account of the follow- mode.
앫 Maneuver phase
ing: If for some reason you do not follow the
앫 Traffic lights driving recommendations or leave the cal-
culated route, COMAND automatically cal-
앫 Stop and right-of-way signs
culates a new route to the destination.
앫 Lane merging
If the map data contains corresponding in-
앫 Parking or stopping prohibited areas formation during route guidance
앫 Other road and traffic rules and regula- COMAND tries to avoid roads with limited
tions passability, e.g. roads that are blocked for
앫 Narrow bridges through-traffic and are for residents only.
COMAND may give incorrect navigation Time restrictions of roads (e.g. blocked on
commands if the data in the digital map Sundays and public holidays) are only tak-
does not correspond with the actual road/ en into account for route guidance if the
traffic situation. For example, if the traffic digital map contains corresponding infor-
routing has been changed or the direction of mation during the blocked time periods.
a one-way road has been reversed.
For this reason, you must always observe
applicable road and traffic rules and regula-
tions during your journey. Road and traffic
rules and regulations always have priority
over the navigation commands generated by
the system.

84
 Navigation
Route Guidance
Preparation Phase i Depending on the selected basic setting in
Information on map (컄 page 59) in 4 you will see
COMAND prepares you for the next driving
maneuver. Based on the example display 앫 Information on “Arrival Time / Distance”
shown below, the announcement is made 앫 Road currently being driven down
using Prepare to turn right. The display is 앫 Geo-coordinate display
not split and displays the map over the en-
tire width. If the menu item None is selected, the display is
hidden.

Announcement Phase
COMAND announces the imminent driving 1 Next road to be taken
maneuver. Based on the example display 2 Point at which the driving maneuver
shown below, the announcement is made takes place (light-blue dot, shown in
900 ft. ahead of the driving maneuver us- the left-hand and the right-hand dis-
ing Please turn right in 900 ft. and follow the play)
’road name’.. 3 Visual distance indicator to the driving
i The announced distance to the maneuver maneuver
depends on the class of road and its speed limit. 4 Driving maneuver (turn right here)
1 Point at which the driving maneuver 5 Distance information to the driving ma-
takes place (light-blue dot) The display is now split in two. The normal
map display is shown in the left-hand half. neuver
2 Next road to be taken 6 Route (highlighted in blue, shown in the
3 Current vehicle location, the tip of the In the right-hand half is either an enlarged
detail of the area around the junction left-hand and right-hand display)
triangle points in the vehicle’s direction
of travel (junction zoom) or a 3D image generated i The solid part of the visual distance indicator
for the course of the road with the route for 3 reduces from bottom to top as the an-
4 Road currently being driven down
the next driving maneuver drawn in nounced driving maneuver gets closer.
(컄 page 86).
The example illustrated below shows the
junction zoom in the right-hand half.

85
Navigation
Route Guidance
Maneuver Phase Example Display without Driving Ma- Traffic Lane Recommendations
COMAND announces the imminent driving neuver On multi-lane roads, COMAND may display
maneuver. In the example, the announce- traffic lane recommendations for imminent
ment is made 90 ft. ahead of the driving driving maneuvers. For this there must be
maneuver using Now turn right.. The display corresponding data available on the digital
is also split into two halves here as in the map.
announcement phase. With respect to the next two driving ma-
neuvers, COMAND displays the traffic lane
recommendations 6, 7 and 8.

1 Route (highlighted in blue)

2 Current vehicle location
3 Road currently being driven down
4 Set map orientation, for explanation
and setting see (컄 page 55)
1 Current vehicle location, tip of the tri- 5 Set map scale, for explanation and set-
angle points in the vehicle’s direction ting see (컄 page 53)
of travel i The map may display other symbols, e.g. the
2 Visual distance indicator to the next destination < or the stopover destination =
driving maneuver (if a stopover destination has been entered).
3 Distance information to the driving ma-
neuver
Once the driving maneuver is complete,
COMAND will automatically switch back to
full-screen display.

86
 Navigation
Route Guidance
Explanation of the Traffic Lane Recom- Depiction of the Traffic Lane Recom-
mendations mendations
앫 Recommended lane 6: The color depiction of the traffic lane rec-
From this lane it is possible to carry out ommendations differs depending on
the next two driving maneuvers without whether the display is set to day or night
changing lanes. design.
앫 Possible lane 7:
From this lane it is only possible to car- Day Design Night Design
ry out the next driving maneuver with- Recommended Recommended
out changing lanes. lane 6 = dark blue lane 6 = light blue
1 Point of the next driving maneuver 앫 Lane not recommended 8: Possible lane Possible lane
2 Point of the second driving maneuver. From this lane it is not possible to carry 7 = light blue 7 = dark blue
3 Next driving maneuver, exit on right out the next driving maneuver without
Lane not recom- Lane not recom-
here changing lanes.
mended 8 = grey mended 8 = grey
4 Visual distance indicator to the next
driving maneuver
5 Distance information to the next driv-
ing maneuver
6 Recommended lane
7 Possible lane
8 Lane not recommended
9 Current vehicle location, tip of the tri-
angle points in the vehicle’s direction
of travel

87
Navigation
Route Guidance
Destination or Destination Region Route Guidance to an Off-road Destina-
Reached tion
Once you have reached your destination, a COMAND can also guide you to destina-
checkered flag is displayed and route guid- tions that are within the area covered by
ance is ended automatically. the digital map, but are not themselves in-
cluded on the map.
Off-road and Off-map Such destinations are off-road destina-
tions, which you can enter, for example, by
G Warning entering the destination via the map.
The COMAND navigation system may direct In this case, COMAND guides you on roads
you to off-road routes that your vehicle may known to the system for as long as possi- 1 Off-road destination
not be capable of traversing through without ble using navigation announcements and 2 Off-road route segment (dashed line)
damaging your tires, wheels or vehicle. It is route guidance displays. 3 Current vehicle location, tip of the tri-
the driver’s sole responsibility to determine angle points in the vehicle’s direction
the suitability of the route. Off-road routes of travel
may be of varying conditions and their ap- 4 Off-road, no road name available
propriateness for use may be affected by Just before reaching the last known point
various factors such as time of day, time of on the map, the message You will enter an
year and immediate weather conditions that area with unreliable map data in xx miles is an-
cannot be judged or taken into consider- nounced.
ation by the COMAND system.
When the vehicle is entering the area that
is not covered by the digital map, the
screen is split. On the right half of the
screen an arrow appears that points to the
off-road destination 1 and the system
announces: Please follow the arrow on the
display. When the vehicle comes close to
the destination the message Destination re-
gion reached is given.

88
 Navigation
Route Guidance
Route Guidance from an Off-road Posi- At the start of route guidance you will see Navigation Announcements
tion to a Destination the message Off Map, an arrow and the dis-
If the vehicle location is within the area
tance to the destination. The arrow indi-
cates the direction of the actual
G Warning
covered by the digital map, but the map it- destination. Navigation announcements are intended to
self does not contain any information on direct you while driving without diverting
the location, the vehicle is in an off-road The blue marking for the route on the map
your attention from the road and driving.
position. COMAND can guide you from starts from the nearest road known to the
system. Please always use this feature instead of
such a position to a destination.
consulting the map display for directions.
At the start of route guidance you will see As soon as the vehicle is travelling again on Consulting the symbols or map display for
the message Off Mapped Road, an arrow and a road known to the system, route guid- directions may cause you to divert your at-
the distance to the destination. The arrow ance continues in the usual manner. tention from driving and increase your risk
indicates the direction of the actual desti- of an accident.
Off-road during Route Guidance
nation.
The blue marking for the route on the map The actual path of the road may deviate i During an active telephone call, the naviga-
starts from the nearest road known to the from the data in the digital map due to road tion announcements are suppressed.
system. works. If you missed an announcement, you can
As soon as the vehicle is travelling again on In cases like this, the system is temporarily request a current announcement at any
a road known to the system, route guid- not able to locate the vehicle location on time.
ance continues in the usual manner. the digital map; the vehicle is thus in an off- 왘 To request current announcement:
road position. Select Navi £ 6.
Route Guidance from an Off-map Posi- The display then shows the message Off
tion to a Destination or
Mapped Road, an arrow and the distance to
the destination. The arrow indicates the di- 왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
If the vehicle location is outside the area tem displayed (컄 page 53) select 6.
covered by the digital map, then the vehi- rection of the actual destination.
cle is in an off-map position. 왘 To switch off navigation announce-
As soon as the vehicle location is found
COMAND can guide you from such a posi- again, route guidance continues in the usu- ments: Press F during the an-
tion to a destination. al manner. nouncement.

89
Navigation
Route Guidance
The message The driving instructions Cancelling Route Guidance 왘 To start route calculation: Select
have been muted appears briefly. Start, see also (컄 page 70).
왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
왘 To switch navigation announce- tem displayed (컄 page 53) select 왘 To change a block: Select Navi£Route
ments back on again manually: Se- Destination £ Cancel Route Guidance. £ Detour £ Change.
lect Navi £ 6. i If a block already exists, the message Detour
or Resuming Route Guidance after Already Set is displayed. You can then change or
Cancelling delete this.
왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
왘 In the map display with the menu sys- 왘 Then set length of block.
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select 6.
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select Desti-
or nation £ Continue Route Guidance.
왘 To delete block: Select Navi £ Route
£ Detour £ Delete.
왘 Start new route calculation COMAND calculates the route.
(컄 page 70). i If a block already exists, the message Detour
Detour Function Already Set is displayed. You can then change or
or delete this.
왘 If you switch COMAND on again or
i The Detour function blocks a route segment
ahead. You can set the length of the block.
start the engine. COMAND calculates a detour route if possible.
왘 To set the volume of the announce- 왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
ments: Set the volume during an auto- tem displayed (컄 page 53) select Route
matic announcement Setting the £ Detour.
Volume (컄 page 31).
왘 To set length of block: Select Longer or
or Shorter repeatedly until the required
왘 Call up an announcement manually us- length is set.
ing Navi £ 6 and set the volume The blocked segment is highlighted in
(컄 page 31). red/white on the map. Shown at the
top of the display is the length of the
blocked segment and the route seg-
ment to which the block goes.
왘 To cancel the function: Select Back.

90
 Navigation
Route Guidance
Alternative Route Route Browser Displaying Destination Information
i You can have other routes calculated for the i The route browser provides an overview of 왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
original route guidance using the Alternative the route. You can move along the route seg- tem displayed (컄 page 53) select
Route function. ment by segment using the route browser and Route £ Destination Information.
view information and details about the route seg-
왘 In the map display with the menu sys- The destination information is given in
ments.
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select the display.
Route £ Alternative Route. 왘 In the map display with the menu sys-
tem displayed (컄 page 53) select
The display is split into two halves. On
Route £ Route Browser.
the left is the map, which displays one
or more alternative routes between the The route browser is in the display.
start and the destination. The current The top of the display shows informa-
route is highlighted in dark blue, other tion on the highlighted route segment,
alternative routes are light blue. e.g. the road and the segment of the
The right side of the display shows in- road to be driven.
formation on the active alternative The highlighted route segment is iden-
route, e.g. length of the segment and tified on the map by its white color and
the estimated time of arrival. red edge. Example display with main destination and
왘 To select next or previous alterna- 왘 To display next or previous route stopover destination
tive route: Select Next or Previous. segment: Select Next or Previous. 1 Distance/estimated time of arrival/es-
The selected route is now highlighted 왘 To enlarge or reduce the map timated journey time to the stopover
in dark blue. display: Select ; or :. destination
왘 To return to the original route guid- 2 Stopover destination=
왘 To close route browser: Select Back. 3 State and City
ance: Select Back.
4 Main destination <
왘 To start route guidance with the se- 5 Distance/estimated time of arrival/es-
lected alternative route guidance: timated journey time to the main desti-
Select Start. nation

91
Navigation
Route Guidance
i When calculating the estimated time of ar- Real-Time Traffic Notifications Real-time Traffic Notifications in the
rival, COMAND uses the time set on the CO- Map
MAND as its basis. For this reason, the time on
i Optional satellite radio equipment and a
subscription to a satellite radio service provider COMAND can display certain traffic events
COMAND must be set correctly (컄 page 37).
are required for the satellite radio reception re- in the map. The notifications are shown in
The calculation of the estimated time of arrival
ferred to here. You can find more information on the map scale range from 0.05 mi to 20 mi.
does not specifically take into consideration
SatRadio in chapter “Satellite Radio”
whether it is summer time or standard time at
(컄 page 141). 왘 Set the map scale: Press Í
the destination. It is not taken into consideration or Ì until the desired map scale is
whether or not the destination is in a different COMAND can receive and incorporate traf- set.
time zone. fic messages via satellite radio into the
The distance to the destination, the estimated navigation system. Traffic report messages
time of arrival and the estimated remaining jour- and map symbols can then be viewed in
ney time 1, 5 are not displayed until the route the COMAND display.
calculation is complete.
왘 To close destination information:
Press ( or &.
or
왘 Press the L button.

1 Marker symbols for the affected route

section
2 Symbol for event on the route
3 Current vehicle position and direction
of travel
4 Marker symbols for the extension of
the affected route section
5 Map scale

92
 Navigation
Route Guidance
Real-Time Traffic Notification Symbols

Symbol Description Traffic Notifications in Map Display Traffic Report Lists Traffic Report Message
Warning (Not possible) Appears with warning Appears with warning entry
entry type type
Incident (Not possible) Appears with incident Appears with incident entry
entry type type
Trafic jam on Appears at the beginning of traffic congestion from the Appears with traffic Appears with traffic jam on
route (stop driver's point of view if route guidance is active and route jam on route (stop and route (stop and go) entry
and go) goes through congested area. go) entry type type
Yellow car symbols could appear in combination with this
symbol.
Trafic jam on Appears at the beginning of traffic congestion from the Appears with Traffic Appears with Traffic jam on
route driver's point of view if route guidance is active and route jam on route entry type route entry type
goes through congested area.
Red car symbols could appear in combination with this
symbol.
Blocked Appears at the beginning of a blocked area from the driver's Appears with Blocked Appears with Blocked sec-
section on point of view if route guidance is active and route goes section entry type tion entry type
route through blocked area.
XXXX symbols could appear in combination with symbol.
Traffic jam Traffic congestion, average speed 25 - 45 mph. (Not possible) (Not possible)
(stop and go) Could appear repeatedly to indicate length of traffic conges-
tion.
Traffic jam Traffic congestion, average speed 5 - 20 mph. (Not possible) (Not possible)
Could appear repeatedly to indicate length of traffic conges-
tion.
XXXX Blocked Road impassable. (Not possible) (Not possible)
section Could appear repeatedly to indicate length of blocked area

93
Navigation
Route Guidance
Displaying Real-Time Traffic Reports List When Route Guidance is not Active List when route guidance is active
왘 If necessary, switch to navigation mode The list shows all the roads, areas or re- The list first shows roads, areas or regions
and show the menu system gions for which messages are available. on the route for which there are traffic re-
(컄 page 53). ports.
왘 Select Traffic.
COMAND searches for SatRadio channels
sending traffic messages.
You will see a dialogue box displaying the
message No Traffic Messages.
This either means:
앫 messages were not yet received
앫 there are no messages available
1 Icon for warning message
왘 To cancel the search: Select Cancel. 2 Country designation 1 To display all traffic messages (includ-
왘 To close the message: 3 Road concerned ing those not concerning the route)
Select OK i A traffic message may also concern an area 2 To have traffic reports read aloud, see
or region rather than a road, e.g. impaired visibil- the reading aloud function (컄 page 95)
If there are traffic reports, you will see a 3 Affected roads, areas or regions (only
list. ity due to fog.
available when there are traffic mes-
The content of the list varies depending on 왘 To read a traffic report: sages for the route)
whether route guidance is active or not. Select a road, an area or region.
왘 To display all messages:
Select Display All Messages.
You will see a list of all roads, areas or
regions for which reports are available,
including those that do not affect the
route.

94
 Navigation
Route Guidance
Example of a traffic message Read-aloud function
The read-aloud function is only available
when route guidance is active. It can read
out traffic reports relating to the route. You
can set the language (컄 page 38) and the
read-aloud speed (컄 page 39).
왘 If necessary, switch to navigation mode
and show the menu system
(컄 page 53).
왘 To display a traffic message: 왘 Select Traffic£Read aloud All Messages
Select a road, area or region from the on Route.
list. 1 Depending on your selection:
COMAND reads out the messages in se-
Messages on the route or All messages
왘 To close the list: quence.
2 Icon for message type, e.g. warning
Press the ( or & button once or message i The Messages on the Route menu item has no
repeatedly. 3 Country designation function if there are no messages relating to the
4 Road, area or region for which there is route.
a message 왘 To cancel read-out of current mes-
5 Text of message sage:
6 Message 1 of 1 for the road affected Select Cancel Read-aloud Function.
왘 To scroll within the message or to or
the next message:
왘 Press the F button.
Press the % or $ button.
COMAND reads the current message
왘 To return to the message list: aloud and then ends the read-aloud func-
Press the ( or & button. tion.

95
Navigation
Destination Memory
Destination Memory The entry My Address is highlighted auto-
matically in the list.
Home Address 왘 To exit menu: Select Back.
i There is always an entry in the destination How you proceed from here depends
memory with the name My Address at the top of
the list. You can assign your home address, for on whether you wish to enter the ad-
example, to this entry. If the My Address entry al- dress manually or use an address book
ready contains data that support navigation (Q entry that supports navigation as your
symbol), you can select this for route guidance. home address.

Assigning Home Address for first Time Entering address manually

or Changing 왘 Switch to the destination memory list
Switching to the destination memory list
without predictive speller without predictive speller if necessary.
왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
and display menu system (컄 page 53). 왘 To assign address for first time:
왘 Press $ repeatedly until the predic-
Press C and select New Entry.
왘 Select Destination £ From Memory. tive speller disappears.
The entry My Address is highlighted auto- 왘 To change home address: Select Op-
If there are more than 8 entries in the
matically in the list provided you have tions £ New Entry.
destination memory, the destination
memory list with predictive speller is not entered any characters in the pre- In both cases, the Enter Destination
displayed, otherwise the destination dictive speller. menu appears.
memory list is displayed without If you have previously entered charac- 왘 Enter the address. Proceed as de-
predictive speller (컄 page 72). ters in the predictive speller: scribed for entering a destination in the
If the list without predictive speller is 왘 Press $ in the list until the entry “Entering a Destination via the Ad-
displayed, the entry My Address is high- My Address is highlighted. dress” section (컄 page 62).
lighted automatically.
or
왘 To assign address for first time:
Press and hold C until the predictive
speller disappears.

96
 Navigation
Destination Memory
왘 After entering the address, select i Under “Assigning a destination to an ad- Selecting Home Address for Route
Save. dress book entry” on (컄 page 99) you will find Guidance
out how to link address book entries to data that
COMAND then saves the entry. A mes- support navigation. i If the My Address entry already contains data
sage is displayed and then the Enter that support navigation, you can select this for
Destination menu with the selected ad- 왘 To confirm selection: Press C. route guidance.
dress. Start is highlighted automatical- Address assigned for first time: If the symbol is missing, then first assign a desti-
ly. nation to this entry (컄 page 96).
COMAND saves the entry. A message is
Using address book entry as home ad- displayed and then the Enter Destination 왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
dress menu with the selected address. Start is and display menu system (컄 page 53).
highlighted automatically. 왘 Select Destination £ From Memory.
왘 Switch to the destination memory list
without predictive speller if necessary To change address: If there are more than 8 entries in the
(컄 page 96). You will be prompted to confirm that you destination memory, the destination
왘 To assign address for first time: wish to overwrite the My Address. memory list with predictive speller is
Press C and select Assign to Address displayed, otherwise the destination
왘 Select Yes or No.
Book Entry. memory list is displayed without
If you select Yes COMAND overwrites predictive speller (컄 page 72).
or the destination. A message is displayed
왘 Destination memory list with
왘 To change home address: Select Op- and then the Enter Destination menu
predictive speller: Press $ repeat-
tions £ Assign to Address Book Entry. with the selected address. Start is high-
edly until the list appears without the
lighted automatically.
In both cases you will see either the list speller.
or, if there are more than 8 address If you select No the list reappears.
or
book entries, the search menu with
search speller. 왘 Select B
Select the desired address book entry. 왘 Press C.
Proceed as described in the “Searching 왘 Destination memory list without
for an address book entry” section predictive speller: Press C.
(컄 page 126).
컄컄

97
Navigation
Destination Memory
Saving a Destination in the Destina- Accepting from the last Destinations
tion Memory 왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
i This function also saves the destination to and display menu system (컄 page 53).
the address book. COMAND creates an address 왘 Select Destination £ From Last Destinati-
book entry there, which contains the complete
ons.
address data that support navigation. You can
then select this entry in the address book and The list of last destinations appears.
from there start navigation to the address. 왘 To select a destination: Press %
or $.
After Entering the Address
왘 To confirm destination: Press C.
The Enter Destination menu is dis- 왘 After entering the address (컄 page 62),
played with the address data for the select Save. The address of the destination is dis-
home address. Start is highlighted au- played.
tomatically. Now you can select memory options.
왘 Select Save.
Starting route calculation During Route Guidance or
왘 Press C. 왘 Display menu system if applicable 왘 Select destination and then Options £
(컄 page 53). Save.
Route guidance begins after the route
has been calculated (컄 page 84). 왘 Select Destination £ Save Destination. In both cases, you can then select
Now you can select memory options. memory options.

98
 Navigation
Destination Memory
Selecting Memory Options You will see either the list or, if there
are more than 8 address book entries,
Saving destination without name the search menu with search speller.
왘 Select Save Without Name. 왘 Select the desired address book entry.
COMAND saves the destination in the Proceed as described in the Searching
destination memory and uses the ad- for an Address Book Entry section
dress as the destination name. (컄 page 126).
or If the selected address book entry does
not yet contain any address data that
왘 Select Save as My Address. support navigation, COMAND saves
COMAND saves the destination under 1 Selected data field with cursor the data.
the My Address entry in the destination 2 Predictive speller
If the selected address book entry al-
memory. 왘 To enter data: Continue with the step ready contains address data that sup-
If the entry already contains data that Switching data field (컄 page 125) in the port navigation, you will be prompted
support navigation, you will be prompt- Creating a New Address Book Entry section. to confirm that you wish to overwrite
ed to confirm that you wish to over- COMAND saves the destination under the existing data.
write the previous destination address. the name entered. 왘 Select Yes or No.
왘 Select Yes or No. If you select Yes COMAND saves the
Assigning destination to an address
If you select Yes the message Saving Pro- book entry data.
cedure Successful appears, selecting No
i This function assigns the complete address
cancels the operation. data that support navigation to an existing ad-
Saving destination with name dress book entry. You can then select this entry
in the address book and from there start naviga-
왘 Select Save With Name. tion to the address.
왘 Select desired category, e.g. Home. 왘 Select Assign to Address Book Entry.
The input menu is displayed with the 왘 Select the desired category, e.g.
data fields and the predictive speller. Home.

99
Navigation
Destination Memory
Deleting Destination or Home Ad- i If the address data, which support naviga-
dress from the Destination Memory tion, for the destination to be deleted has also
been assigned to an address book entry,
왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode COMAND deletes this data there too. If the cor-
and display menu system (컄 page 53). responding address book entry does not contain
왘 Select Destination £ From Memory. any other data, e.g. phone numbers, COMAND
deletes the entire address book entry.
If there are more than 8 entries in the
destination memory, the destination
memory list with predictive speller
(컄 page 71) is displayed, otherwise the
destination memory list is displayed
without predictive speller (컄 page 72).
왘 Select destination you want. Proceed
as described for entering a destination
in the “Entering a Destination from the
Destination Memory” section
(컄 page 71).
왘 Select Delete.
You will be prompted to confirm that
you wish to delete the destination.
왘 Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes COMAND deletes the
destination. A message will be dis-
played.

100
 Navigation
Last Destinations
Last Destinations Saving Crosshairs Position in the Deleting one of the Last Destina-
i COMAND automatically saves the last desti- Last Destinations tions
nations used for the last route calculation. If the i If you move the map manually, crosshairs 왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode
memory is full, COMAND deletes the oldest des- will appear on it. The crosshairs position can be and display menu system (컄 page 53).
tination. You can also save a destination from saved as a destination in the last destinations
the last destinations to the destination memory. memory.
왘 Select Destination £ From Last Destinati-
Here it is saved permanently. ons.
왘 To display menu system if applica-
The list of last destinations appears.
Saving a Destination Permanently in ble: Press C.
왘 Select the desired destination.
the Destination Memory 왘 Select Position £ Save Crosshair Positi-
왘 Proceed as described in the “Accepting on. 왘 Select Options £Delete.
from the last Destinations” section or during route guidance
(컄 page 98).
왘 To display menu system if applica-
Saving Vehicle Location in the Last ble: Press C.
Destinations 왘 Select Position £ Destination Position
왘 If necessary switch to navigation mode Map.
and display menu system (컄 page 53). The map with the crosshairs position
왘 Select Position £ Save Vehicle Position. on the destination appears.
COMAND saves the current vehicle lo- 왘 To show the menu system: Press C.
cation as a destination in the last desti- 왘 Select Position £ Save Crosshair Positi-
nations memory. on.
COMAND saves the crosshairs position
as a destination in the last destinations
memory.

101
102
 Telephone
General Information................... 105
Activating the Mobile Phone..... 106
Submenu Overview.................... 111
COMAND Phone Book ................ 113
Call Lists...................................... 117
Making Calls ............................... 121
Address Book.............................. 124

103
Telephone
Safety Precautions
Safety Precautions G Warning
You and others may damage your health due
G Warning to excessive electromagnetic radiation. By
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using an external antenna, the possible
using a cellular telephone while driving. health risks of electromagnetic fields, which
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety are under discussion among the scientific
reasons, the driver should not use the cellu- community, should be largely prevented.
lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before
placing or answering a call. G Warning
If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile Never operate radio transmitters equipped
phone while driving, please use the hands- with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
free feature and be sure to pay attention to out being connected to an external antenna)
the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo- from inside the vehicle while the engine is
bile phone only when road, weather and traf- running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
fic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
not be able to observe traffic conditions and sibly resulting in an accident and/or
could endanger yourself and others. personal injury.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
ly 14 m) every second.

104
 Telephone
General Information
General Information Interruptions to the Connection The explanations in this section assume
that the mobile phone is connected to CO-
While Driving
Vehicle Equipment MAND via the Bluetooth® interface. Excep-
Interruptions to the connection may occur
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- if
tions are explicitly described.
tures, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please 앫 there is inadequate GSM network cov- Functional Restrictions
be aware that your vehicle might not be erage in certain regions Under the following circumstances, the
equipped with all features described in this man- phone may not yet be useable:
앫 you are switching from one GSM trans-
ual. 앫 If it is not yet logged into a network.
mitting/receiving station (GSM cell) to
Making Calls via Bluetooth ® another and there is no voice channel The phone will try independently to log
Interface available in this cell into a network. If no network is
The telephone function via the Bluetooth® 앫 you are using a SIM card that is not available, you will not be able to make
interface is available in conjunction with a compatible with the available network. “911” emergency calls.
Bluetooth-enabled mobile phone. If you try to make an outgoing call, the
앫 when using a mobile phone with “Twin-
message No Service appears briefly.
With a suitable mobile phone, you can use card”, the mobile phone is simulta-
COMAND’s hands-free feature to down- neously logged into the network with
load electronic business cards (vCards) via the second SIM card.
the Bluetooth® interface.
Operating Options
Further information on suitable mobile If the mobile phone is connected with
phones and connecting Bluetooth-enabled COMAND via the Bluetooth® interface, you
mobile phones to COMAND is available via can operate the phone using the following
the Internet at www.mbusa-mobile.com. devices:
앫 Keypad on the COMAND control unit
앫 Multifunction steering wheel
앫 Voice Control

105
Telephone
Activating the Mobile Phone
Activating the Mobile Phone i On certain mobile phones, not only do you Searching for a Mobile Phone
have to activate the Bluetooth® function but the 왘 In the phone submenu select Phone £
Mobile Phone with Bluetooth® Inter- device must also be made “visible” for other de- Phone List £ Update.
face vices.
Each Bluetooth® device has a Bluetooth® device COMAND searches for suitable Blue-
Prerequisites for the Mobile Phone name. It is recommended to give the device a tooth® phones within range and enters
personal name, by which you can clearly recog- them in the phone list.
For making calls using COMAND via the
Bluetooth® interface, you will need a Blue-
nize your mobile phone. i The duration of the search procedure de-
tooth-enabled mobile phone. i If the Bluetooth function on the pends on the number and type of Bluetooth®
COMAND is switched off, the message Bluetooth phones. The search may take a few minutes.
i Not all mobile phones available on the mar- not activated in system settings. appears.
ket are comparably suitable. Further information When first entering the device list and be-
® fore running an update, the black
on suitable mobile phones and connecting Blue- 왘 Activate Bluetooth connection on
tooth-enabled mobile phones to COMAND is COMAND (컄 page 169). dotRindicates the active phone (found
available via the Internet at and authorized).
www.mbusa-mobile.com. Registering a Mobile Phone
After running an update:
(Authorizing)
Activating Bluetooth®
When you use your mobile phone in con-
Before you begin activation of your mobile junction with COMAND for the first time,
phone connection via the Bluetooth® inter- you must register (authorize) it.
face please ensure it is compatible with It is possible to register several mobile
Bluetooth® handsfree profile 1.0 phones. The connection is always estab-
(컄 mobile phone operating guide) lished to the mobile phone that was acti-
왘 Switch on the mobile phone and enter vated last. When you authorize a new
the PIN, if applicable (컄 mobile phone mobile phone, it is activated automatically.
operating guide). You can switch between the authorized
왘 Activate Bluetooth® connection on the mobile phones (컄 page 108).
Phone icons 3 indicate if a phone is found
mobile phone (컄 mobile phone operat- (black) or not (grey).
ing guide).

106
 Telephone
Activating the Mobile Phone
The check marks 1 indicate if a phone If a Bluetooth® connection is established
has been authorized (black) or not (grey). successfully, you will be prompted to enter
If a phone is not in the vehicle but has been a code on the mobile phone (컄 mobile
authorized previously, the phone symbol phone operating guide).
and the check mark are grey 2. 왘 Enter the same passcode on the mobile
i If the device list already contains ten autho- phone as you did on COMAND.
rized devices, you must de-authorize one of the The device is authorized. You can now
authorized devices (컄 page 108). You will then make calls via COMAND’s hands-free
have to switch this device off and start the device using the authorized
search again. Otherwise the new device you are mobile phone.
looking for will not appear in the list. i The passcode is any number chosen by you
왘 To start search again: between one and sixteen digits in length. We rec- External Authorization
Select Update. ommend to use at least four digits because this If COMAND cannot find your mobile phone,
improves the quality of the encryption during
this may be due to special security settings
Entering Passcode connection. The passcode can differ during each
on your mobile phone. In this case, you can
왘 Select the as yet unauthorized device authorization for each device. You must enter
the same number on COMAND and on the device
check whether, conversely, your mobile
(no check mark yet) from the list. phone can find COMAND.
to be authorized. Please also refer to the instruc-
왘 Select Options £ Authorize or tions in the mobile phone operating guide. COMAND’s Bluetooth® device name is
왘 Press C. 왘 To enter from COMAND: Select the “MB Bluetooth”.
The input menu for the passcode ap- digits in the menu bar or type them on 왘 In the phone submenu select Phone £
pears. the keypad one after the other. Phone List £ Update £ Options £ Ex-
왘 To correct entry: Select õ. ternal Authorization.

왘 To cancel entry: Select Back. 왘 Start Bluetooth® search procedure on

the mobile phone (컄 mobile phone op-
왘 To confirm entry: Select B. erating guide).
왘 Select COMAND (“MB Bluetooth”) from
the device list on your mobile phone.
컄컄

107
Telephone
Activating the Mobile Phone
왘 When prompted to do so, enter the Deregistering (De-authorizing) a Mobile Activating Another Mobile Phone
passcode on the mobile phone and on Phone
COMAND. If you have authorized several mobile
왘 In the phone submenu select Phone £ phones, you can switch between the indi-
Displaying Details on a Mobile Phone Phone List. vidual mobile phones.
왘 Select the authorized mobile phone. When you authorize a new mobile phone, it
왘 In the phone submenu select Phone £
Phone List. 왘 Select Options £ De-Authorize. is activated automatically. Only one mobile
phone is active at a time.
왘 Select the mobile phone from the list. You will be asked whether the device
should really be de-authorized. 왘 Select Phone £ Phone List.
왘 Select Options £ Details.
왘 Select Yes or No. 왘 Select the mobile phone from the list.
The details screen for the device is dis-
played. If you select Yes, the authorization of 왘 Press C.
왘 To close details screen: Press $, the device is withdrawn. The selected mobile phone is activated
%, (, & or C. i If the authorization of a device, which had if the selected mobile is within recep-
been authorized in the past, has been withdrawn tion range and its Bluetooth® function
and it is no longer found in the search, the device is switched on. Any previously activat-
list no longer includes this device. ed phone is deactivated.

108
 Telephone
Activating the Mobile Phone
Setting Transmit and Receive Vol-
ume
i These settings should normally not be
changed as the factory settings are matched to
most mobile phones.
i Changes may result in significant impair-
ments to the transmission quality. These set-
tings may not be changed during an active phone
call.
왘 In the phone submenu select Phone £
Adjust Volume. 왘 To set the volume: Press $ or
%.
왘 Select Reception Volume or Transmission Vo-
lume. The red bar moves up or down.
i Reception volume and Transmission only ap- 왘 To confirm selection: Press C.
pear for authorized devices.

109
Telephone
Activating the Mobile Phone
왘 Enter the digits on the COMAND con-
“911” Emergency Call
trol unit (컄 page 121).
G Warning 왘 Press the s button.
The 911 emergency call system is a public The phone establishes the connection.
service. Using it without due cause is a 왘 Wait until the emergency call centre
criminal offense. answers, then describe the emergency.

The following conditions must be met for a

“911” emergency call:
앫 Phone switched on
앫 Mobile phone network available
앫 Valid SIM card in the phone
(not required on all mobile phone net-
works)
앫 Mobile phone connected with
COMAND via Bluetooth®
If you are unable to make an emergency
call, you will have to initiate rescue mea-
sures yourself.
The “911” emergency number is a public
service. Any abuse is punishable by law.

110
 Telephone
Submenu Overview
Submenu Overview

Name Telephone Call Lists or Mic On/Off

Displays the COMAND phone book Telephone list Displays or deletes call lists
Downloads contacts Switches hands-free microphone on/off
(during a call)
Deletes contacts
Adjusts the volume

111
Telephone
Submenu Overview
Phone Main Menu
Switching to Phone Mode
왘Press the function button h on the
COMAND control unit.
i If you press the s button with the phone
main menu already open, the call list “Calls Di-
aled” appears (컄 page 117).
or
From Another Main Function 1 Phone service status
2 Signal strength (if provided by phone)
왘 Select Phone £ Phone £ Phone.
3 Call status
i If phone mode was active last, you only need 4 Displays COMAND phone book
to select Phone. 5 Displays call list selection
6 Speller with characters for entering
Within the Phone Function
phone numbers
왘 Select Phone £ Phone. 7 Device name of the connected mobile
or phone
왘 In the phone mode press the í but-
ton repeatedly until the phone main
menu appears.

112
 Telephone
COMAND Phone Book
COMAND Phone Book Selecting an Entry
The COMAND phone book is an extract of Selecting via list
entries from the COMAND address book.
All the COMAND address book entries hav- 왘 Press $ or % until the desired
ing at least one phone number can be entry is highlighted.
found in the COMAND phone book.
Selecting subentries
i For many operating functions you can also
use the buttons on the multifunction steering 왘 Select an address book entry with the
wheel, e.g. the (, &, $, %, #, symbol + from the list and press C.
s or t buttons, for selecting a track or a
menu, scrolling through lists or initiating or end- COMAND phone book with search speller The symbol + changes into / and
ing a call (컄 page 23). the subentries appear.
1 Address book entry
2 Calls up options
Opening COMAND Phone Book
3 Search speller
왘 Open the phone main menu 4 Closes phone book
(컄 page 112). 5 m symbol for voice tag
왘 Select Name. Address book entries may have the symbol
The COMAND phone book is displayed. 5. An additional voice tag is saved with
these entries.
If an address book entry has the symbol
+ then this has more than one phone
number. You can select these subentries
(컄 page 113). 1 Expanded phone book entry
왘 To close phone book: In the search 2 Phone book entry with subentries
speller select the symbol A. 왘 Press $ or % until the desired
or subentry is highlighted.
왘 Press í.

113
Telephone
COMAND Phone Book
Displaying details on an entry Creating a New Entry Switching Data Field
COMAND can also fully display an abbrevi- i When a new entry is added through the 왘 Press $ until the predictive speller
ated entry. COMAND phone book, it is saved to the address is not highlighted.
book.
왘 Select entry. 왘 Then press $ or % to select de-
왘 Select Options £ New Entry in the CO- sired field and press C.
왘 Select Options £ Details.
MAND phone book.
The details screen appears. or
왘 Select a number category, e.g.
왘 Select [ or ] in the speller.
왘 To close details screen: Press ( or Home.
& repeatedly until the entry is high- The input menu indicates the selected
왘 Select a phone category, e.g.
lighted again. data field.
Mobile Phone.
Initiating Call to an Entry 왘 Select Save.
왘 Select entry (컄 page 113). The input menu with the data fields ap-
왘 Press C. pears.
or
왘 Press the s button on the CO-
MAND control unit.
If the entry contains subentries, a list
appears.
왘 Select the desired subentry.
왘 Press C again.
or
왘 Press the s button on the 1 Cursor
COMAND control unit. 2 Data field
3 Predictive speller
4 Selected phone category

114
 Telephone
COMAND Phone Book
Entering Data into a Field The character to the left of the cursor is Deleting Entry
deleted.
왘 Select all the characters one after the The deletion rules vary according to the en-
other in the predictive speller 3. 왘 To delete an entire entry: Select try selected:
õ and press and hold C until the
i The predictive speller provides the charac- entire entry has been deleted. 앫 Phone book entry selected:
ters corresponding to the selected data field. The entry is deleted in the COMAND
or phone book and the address book if the
왘 To switch predictive speller to up-
per or lower case characters: Select 왘 Press and hold î until the entire en- address book entry only contains
( or &. try has been deleted. phone numbers.
왘 To switch predictive speller charac- 앫 Entire address book entry selected:
Cancelling an Entry
ter set: Select #. The entry is deleted in the COMAND
왘 Select A. phone book and additionally also in the
Every time this is selected it switches address book if the address book entry
the character set. If one of the data fields contains data,
only contains phone numbers.
you will be prompted to confirm wheth-
왘 To change the predictive speller lan- 앫 Subentry of an address book entry se-
er you wish to save the entry.
guage: Select !. lected:
왘 Select Yes or No.
왘 Press $ or % until the required The subentry is deleted in the
language is highlighted and press C. The entry will be saved or discarded COMAND phone book and in the ad-
on the basis of the selection. dress book.
왘 To move the cursor in the data field:
Select Y or Z. Saving Entry 왘 To delete: Select entry (컄 page 124).
Deleting an Entry 왘 Select Options £ Delete.
왘 Select B
You will be prompted to confirm that
왘 To delete an individual character: A corresponding message is displayed.
you really want to delete the entry.
Select õ and briefly press C.
왘 Select Yes or No.
or
Yes option: The entry is deleted accord-
왘 Press the î button on the ing to the above rules.
COMAND control unit.

115
Telephone
COMAND Phone Book
왘 Select the number to be overwritten. 왘 Press and hold î until the entry has
Adding Phone Number to a Phone
The input menu appears with the data been deleted.
Book Entry
왘 Select the phone book entry field for entering the new phone num- 왘 To save entry: Select B.
(컄 page 124). ber appears.
왘 To enter digits: Select all the digits
왘 Select Options £ Add Phone No..
one after the other in the predictive
왘 Select a number category, e.g. speller or using the number keypad.
Home.
왘 To move the cursor in the data field:
왘 Select a phone category, e.g. Select Y or Z.
Mobile Phone.
왘 To delete individual digits: Select
왘 Select Save. õ and briefly press C.
If five numbers are saved for the entry or
in the selected number category, you
왘 Press the î button on the
will be prompted to confirm whether
you wish to overwrite one of the exist- COMAND control unit.
ing numbers. The digit to the left of the cursor is de-
왘 Select Yes or No. leted.
왘 To delete an entire entry: Select
If you select Yes a selection list ap-
pears containing the existing five õ and press and hold C until the
numbers. entire entry has been deleted.
or

116
 Telephone
Call Lists
Call Lists A list of the last dialed calls appears. i You can call the selected list entry
(컄 page 122).
COMAND displays the calls received (in-
cluding missed calls) or made during 왘 To close list: Select Back.
phone mode in their own lists.
Displaying Details on a List entry
i The particular menu item can only be select-
ed if calls have already been received or made COMAND can also fully display an abbrevi-
from COMAND. ated list entry.
The display of missed calls in the COMAND dis- 왘 Select the list entry.
play is not possible with all mobile phones.
왘 Select Options £ Details.
i The instrument cluster control system The details screen appears.
displays a list of the last dialed calls.
List of incoming calls 왘 Back to the list: Press ( or &
i For many operating functions you can also
use the buttons on the multifunction steering 1 List of calls received repeatedly until the list is highlighted.
wheel, e.g. the (, &, $, %, #, 2 Date/time of the highlighted entry
s or t buttons, for selecting a track or a 3 List entry options menu
menu, scrolling through lists or initiating or end- 왘 To select a list entry: Press $ or
ing a call (컄 page 23).
%.
Calling up the List
왘 In the phone main menu select Call
Lists.
왘 Select Calls Received or Calls Dialed.
The appropriate list appears.
or
왘 In the phone main menu
press s.

117
Telephone
Call Lists
Saving Unsaved List Entry
Number category Display
Unsaved list entries are displayed by (phone and ad-
means of the phone numbers. dress book)
Saved list entries are displayed as the “Not Classified” G
name. They are either saved in the address
“Home” k
book or in the COMAND phone book.
“Work” l
Saving in the Address Book as a New
Entry Phone category
왘 Select the list entry. “Not Classified” G
1 Cursor
왘 Select Options £Save£ New Entry. “Mobile Phone” O 2 Data field
i Save has no function if the selected list entry “Car” n 3 Speller
has already been saved to the address book. 4 Data field for phone number is com-
“Pager” < pleted automatically
왘 Select a number category, e.g.
5 Phone category
Home. 왘 Select Save. 6 Number category
왘 Select a phone category, e.g. An input menu with data fields will ap- 왘 To switch data field: Press $ until
Mobile Phone. pear. The data field for the phone num- the last name line is highlighted.
ber is completed automatically. The
왘 Press C.
data field for the last name is also com-
pleted if the entry to be saved contains or
a name. 왘 Select [ or ] and press C.
The selected data field is highlighted.
왘 To enter data into a field: Select all
the characters one after the other in
the speller 3.

118
 Telephone
Call Lists
i The speller provides the characters corre- or Adding a Phone Number from the Call
sponding to the selected data field. List to an Existing Address Book Entry
왘 Press and hold î until the entry has
왘 To switch predictive speller to up- been deleted. 왘 Select the list entry (컄 page 117).
per or lower case characters: Select
왘 To save entry: Select B 왘 Select Options £ Save£Add Phone No..
( or &.
A corresponding message is displayed. i Save has no function if the selected list entry
왘 To switch predictive speller charac- is already saved in the address book.
ter set: Select #. 왘 To cancel entry: Select Back.
왘 Select a number category, e.g.
Every time this is selected it switches If one of the data fields contains data,
Home.
the character set (digits, lower case let- you will be prompted to confirm wheth-
ters). er you wish to save the entry. 왘 Select a phone category, e.g.
Mobile Phone.
왘 To change the predictive speller lan- 왘 Select Yes or No.
guage: Select !. The entry will be saved or discarded 왘 Select Save.
왘 Press $ or % until the required on the basis of the selection. The search menu for address book en-
language is highlighted and press C. tries appears.
왘 To move the cursor in the data field: 왘 Search for the required entry.
Select Y or Z. i Please see the “Searching for an Address
왘 To delete an individual character: Book Entry” section (컄 page 126) for a detailed
description on searching for an address book en-
Select õ and briefly press C.
try.
or
왘 Press C after completing the search.
왘 Press the î button on the
If there are fewer than five numbers
COMAND control unit.
saved for the required entry in the se-
The character to the left of the cursor is lected number category, COMAND
deleted. saves the data.
왘 To delete an entire entry: Select A corresponding message is displayed.
õ and press and hold C until the
entire entry has been deleted.
컄컄

119
Telephone
Call Lists
If five numbers are saved for the re- Deleting Call Lists
quired entry, you will be prompted to
confirm whether you wish to overwrite i The saved call lists are retained in COMAND
even if you use the COMAND with another mo-
one of the existing numbers.
bile phone. For this reason you should delete any
왘 Select Yes or No. call lists before handing over or selling the vehi-
If you select Yes a selection list appears cle.
containing the existing five numbers. 왘 In the phone main menu (컄 page 112)
왘 Select the number to be overwritten. select Call Lists.
COMAND overwrites the selected num- 왘 Select Delete Call Lists.
ber with the new data. 왘 Select Yes or No.
If you select Yes, the call list will be de-
leted.

120
 Telephone
Making Calls
Making Calls After accepting the call, you will conduct Entering Phone Number via Phone Main
the conversation over the hands-free sys- menu
Incoming Call tem. The call volume can be adjusted
(컄 page 35). Please see the “Functions 왘 Open the phone main menu
Rejecting or Accepting Calls during a Single Call” section for other func- (컄 page 112).
Incoming calls are indicated by a pop-up. tions (컄 page 122). 왘 To enter digits: Select all the digits
i You can also accept a call as described one after the other in the speller.
above if COMAND is displaying a screen for an- 왘 To delete individual digits: Select
other main application. After accepting the call, õ and briefly press C.
the display switches to the phone display.
or
Initiating an Outgoing Call 왘 Press the î button.
Entering Phone Number via the 왘 To delete entire phone numbers: Se-
COMAND Control Unit lect õ and press and hold C until
the phone number has been deleted.
왘 Open the phone main menu
(컄 page 112). or
왘 To reject: Select Reject. 왘 Enter all the digits on the numeric key- 왘 Press and hold î until the entry has
or pad one after the other. been deleted.
왘 왘 To initiate call: Select G on the right
왘 Press t on the COMAND control To delete individual digits:
unit’s keypad or on the multifunction Briefly press the î button. in the speller.
steering wheel. 왘 To delete entire phone numbers: Redialing
왘 To accept: Select Accept. Press and hold î until the number
왘 Open the phone main menu
or has been deleted.
(컄 page 112).
왘 To initiate call: Press the s button.
왘 Press s on the COMAND control 왘 Select G.
unit’s keypad or on the multifunction or
steering wheel. or
왘 Press the s button on the multi-
function steering wheel. 컄컄

121
Telephone
Making Calls
왘 Press the s button on the CO- 왘 To select call: Press $ or %. Functions during a Single Call
MAND control unit when the phone 왘 To initiate call: Press C.
main menu is displayed.
The dialed calls list appears. The call di- Initiating a Call to a Call List Entry or
aled last will be at the top of the list. COMAND Phone Book Entry
왘 Open the call list and select an entry
(컄 page 117).
or
컄컄왘 Open the COMAND phone book and
select an entry (컄 page 124).
왘 To initiate call: Press C.
Phone mode with a single call
1 Other party
2 Symbol for active phone connection
3 Switches the hands-free microphone
off or on
4 Sends DTMF tones (not possible with
all mobile phones)
5 Device name of the connected mobile
phone
6 Terminates call

122
 Telephone
Making Calls
Switching Hands-free Microphone On 왘 Transmitting phone book entry as a Call Waiting
or Off sequence of characters: Select Name.
i The call waiting function must be supported
왘 Open the phone main menu 왘 Select the desired phone book entry. and activated by the phone provider.
(컄 page 112). The entry is transmitted immediately as If you are conducting a single call and you
왘 To switch off: Select Mic Off. a sequence of characters. receive another, the second call number is
왘 To switch back to call display: Select entered into the received calls list and a
When the microphone is switched off
the symbol > appears in the main ar- Back. signal tone will sound.
ea.
Ending an Active Call
왘 To switch on: Select Mic On.
왘 Switch display to phone mode if neces-
The symbol > disappears sary (컄 page 112).
Sending DTMF Tones 왘 To terminate call: Select 4.
i This function is not possible with all mobile or
phones. 왘 Press t on the COMAND control
Answering machines or other devices can unit or on the multifunction steering
be controlled via DTMF tones, e.g. for re- wheel.
mote query functions.
왘 To transmit individual characters:
During a call select the required char-
acters using the ( or & button.
or
왘 Press the corresponding button on the
COMAND control unit keypad.
Every selected character is transmitted
immediately.

123
Telephone
Address Book
Within the Phone Function
C

Address Book Submenu overview for address book

왘 Select Phone £ Address Book.
G Warning The address book main display ap-
Address book Search
Please devote your attention first and fore- pears. Downloading con- Searching for an
most to the traffic situation you are in. tacts (from mobile address book entry
phone, from mem-
Before your journey please familiarize your-
ory card or busi-
self with the address book functions.
ness cards)
Only use the COMAND when road and traffic
conditions permit you to do so. Otherwise
Deleting contacts
you could be involved in an accident in New Delete
which you or others could be injured.
Creating a new ad- Deleting an ad-
dress book entry dress book entry
General Information
The entries of the address book can be Selecting Entry in the Address Book
Address book with address book entry i
used for making phone calls and naviga- and data that support navigation Q 왘Press ( or & if the display/se-
tion destination entries.
i You should delete your personal data before i An address book entry may contain up to lection window is active.
five phone numbers and both a private and busi-
selling your vehicle, using the Reset function
ness address.
(컄 page 171).

Opening the Address Book

From another main function
왘 Select Phone £ Phone £ Address Book.
i If the address book was the last function
open in the phone function, you only need to se-
lect Phone.

124
 Telephone
Address Book
Switching Data Field 왘 Press $ or % until the required
Creating a New Address Book Entry
language is highlighted and press C.
i You can create address data directly in the 왘 Press $ repeatedly until the predic-
address book. If you save phone numbers in the tive speller is hidden. 왘 To move the cursor in the data field:
COMAND phone book, these are saved in the ad- Select Y or Z.
왘 Then press $ or % and press C
dress book. When you save a navigation destina-
tion, COMAND creates an address book entry to select a data field. Deleting
containing the complete address data that sup- or 왘 To delete an individual character:
port navigation.
왘 Select [ or ] in the speller. Select õ and briefly press C.
왘 Open the address book (컄 page 124) The input menu indicates the selected or
and select New. data field. 왘 Press î button.
The input menu with the data fields and
the speller appears. Entering Data into a Field The character to the left of the cursor is
deleted.
왘 Select all the characters one after the
other in the predictive speller 2. 왘 To delete an entire entry: Select
õ and press and hold C until the
i The predictive speller provides the charac- entire entry has been deleted.
ters corresponding to the selected data field.
or
왘 To switch predictive speller to up-
per or lower case characters: Select 왘 Press and hold î until the entire en-
( or &. try has been deleted.
왘 To switch predictive speller charac-
ter set: Select #.
Input menu with data fields Every time this is selected it switches
the character set.
1 Selected data field with cursor
2 Speller 왘 To change the predictive speller lan-
guage: Select !.

125
Telephone
Address Book
Cancelling an Entry Searching for an Address Book Entry address data from the navigation system,
which support navigation and are covered
왘 Select A. 왘 Open the address book (컄 page 124)
by the digital map data. You can quickly
If one of the data fields contains new and select Search. start route guidance to this kind of entry
data, you will be prompted to confirm If there are more than eight entries, the (컄 page 129).
whether you wish to save the entry. search menu with the search speller
appears. Switching from Search Speller to the
왘 Select Yes or No. List
The entry will be saved or discarded
on the basis of the selection. 왘 Press $ repeatedly or press and
hold C until the search speller is dis-
Saving Entry played.
왘 Select B. or
왘 Select B.
The address book displays the entry.
Switching from the List to the Search
Speller
왘 Select A from the list.
Search menu with search speller
1 i symbol for address book entry
2 Q symbol for complete address data
from navigation
3 m symbol for voice tag
4 Search speller
Entries without symbols or with the sym-
bols 1 and 3 are just address book en-
tries. A voice tag has additionally been
saved for entries with the symbol 3. En-
tries with the symbol 2 contain complete

126
 Telephone
Address Book
Searching 왘 To delete an entire entry: Select Deleting Entry
õ and press and hold C until the
왘 Search for the required entry
Searching via Search Speller entire entry has been deleted.
(컄 page 126).
왘 Switch if necessary from the list to the or
search speller. 왘 Select Options £ Delete.
왘 Press and hold î until the entire en-
왘 To change the search speller lan- try has been deleted. A delete prompt appears.
guage: Select !. 왘 To end search: Switch from the search 왘 Select Yes or No.
왘 To switch search speller character speller to the list. The entry will be deleted or retained on
set: Select #. The top list entry is highlighted auto- the basis of the selection.
Depending on the previous setting, this matically. Displaying Details for an Address
switches it to letters with special char- 왘 Back to the address book: Switch if Book Entry
acters or numbers with special charac- necessary from the list to the search
ters. 왘 Switch from the search speller to the
speller and in the search speller select list (컄 page 126).
왘 To enter characters: Select the char- A.
acters for the required entry one after or
another. Searching via List 왘 Select an address book entry in the ad-
왘 To delete an individual character: 왘 If necessary, switch from the search dress book (컄 page 124).
Select õ and briefly press C. speller to the list (컄 page 126). 왘 Press C.
or 왘 Press $ or % until the desired The details screen appears.
entry in the list is highlighted.
왘 Press the î button.
After entering each character or after
each deletion of a character, the clos-
est matching entry is given at the top of
the list.

127
Telephone
Address Book
Closing Details Screen 왘 Continue from the step “Switching
Data Field” in the “Creating a New
왘 Select Back. Address Book Entry” section
Changing Entry (컄 page 125).

Changing an Address Book Entry Changing Category of a

Phone Number Data Field
왘 Search for an address book entry
(컄 page 126). 왘 Display the details for an entry and
highlight the phone number data field
왘 Select Options £ Change Entry. (컄 page 127).
Details screen for private data or 왘 Select Options £ Change Category.
1 Back to the previous menu 왘 Display details for an address book en- 왘 Select a number category, e.g.
2 Selected data field try. Home.
3 k symbol for private data 왘 Select Options £ Change Entry. 왘 Select a phone category, e.g.
4 Calls up options
Mobile Phone.
5 l symbol for business data
왘 If necessary select Preferred.
Selecting Another Data Field
Depending on the previous status, the
왘 Press $ or %. option will be switched on D or off C.
The phone number is displayed in the
Displaying Abbreviated Content in Full phone book as the first number and
can be dialed immediately.
왘 Select Options £ Details.
왘 Select Save.
The complete display appears.
The new category is saved.
왘 To close complete display: Press
(, & or C. The input menu with the data fields ap-
pears.

128
 Telephone
Address Book
Initiating a Phone Call to an Entry Starting Navigation to an Entry
i The mobile phone must be connected via i You can use this function as soon as you
the Bluetooth® interface. have saved a destination in the destination mem-
ory (컄 page 159). COMAND then also saves the
왘 Display the details for an entry and
destination in the address book with the com-
highlight the phone number data field
plete address data that support navigation.
(컄 page 127).
왘 Search for an address book entry with
왘 Press C.
the Q symbol (컄 page 126).
The phone initiates the call. The display
왘 Display the details for an entry and
switches to the phone mode display.
highlight the address data field
or (컄 page 127). 1 Address that supports navigation
2 Opens Enter Destination menu
왘 Select Options £ Call. 왘Press C.
The Enter Destination menu appears,
The phone initiates the call. i Pressing C only functions if the address the selector bar is located at the menu
data field contains complete data that support
item Start (컄 page 135).
navigation. This is indicated by the Q symbol.
왘 Start the route calculation.
or
왘 Select Options £ Navigate.
i Navigate can only be selected if the address
data field contains complete data that support
navigation. This is indicated by the Q symbol.

129
Telephone
Address Book
Voice Tags Listening to Voice Tag
i Voice tags can be entered via Voice Control 왘 Search for an address book entry with
System. a voice tag (컄 page 126).
Adding or Changing Voice Tag 왘 Select Options £ Voice Name £ Listen.
You will hear the voice tag.
i You can add one voice tag per address book
entry. Downloading Contacts
왘 Search for an address book entry with- You can download contacts into the ad-
out or with a voice tag (m display) dress book from an external Bluetooth de-
(컄 page 126). vice or memory card.
왘 Select From Mobile Phone or From Memory
왘 Select Options £ Voice Name £ Add or i Bluetooth® devices must be inside the vehi- Card or Receive Business Cards.
Change. cle, switched on, activated, authorized and capa-
ble of sending contacts and/or vCards via 왘 Press C.
The process continues by voice com-
mands. The Voice Control System Bluetooth®. The download begins.
guides you through the dialogs Downloading Data Deleting Data
(컄 page 176).
왘 Start communication at the external 왘 When the address book is displayed se-
Deleting Voice Tag device (컄 operator’s guide of the exter- lect Address Book£Delete Contacts.
왘 Search for an address book entry with nal device).
a voice tag (컄 page 126). or
왘 Select Options £ Voice Name £ Delete. 왘 Insert memory card
A delete prompt appears. 왘 Select Address Book£ Download Contacts
왘 Select Yes or No. on COMAND.
COMAND will delete or retain the voice A selection menu appears.
tag on the basis of the selection.

130
 Audio
Audio Menu ................................. 132
Radio............................................ 133
HD Radio™ Broadcasting .......... 137
Satellite Radio ............................ 141
CD Audio/DVD Audio/MP3 ....... 147
Music Register............................ 163
Media Interface .......................... 167
Audio Aux .................................... 173

131
Audio
Audio Menu
Vehicle Equipment Calling up the Audio Menu
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- 왘 Select Audio.
tures, standard or optional, potentially available
The audio mode last active is switched
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be
on.
equipped with all features described in this man- or
ual. 왘 Press the b function button.
Audio Menu Radio mode is switched on.
i This Operator’s Manual describes all fea- 왘 Select Audio.
tures, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please The audio menu appears. Display with Audio menu
be aware that your vehicle might not be i If radio mode was active last, you only need 1 Main function line
equipped with all features described in this man- to select Audio. 2 Audio menu
ual. 3 Current audio mode
i Information on the COMAND control system You can switch to the various audio modes
and how to operate it can be found on in the audio menu:
(컄 page 16) and (컄 page 26).
앫 FM / AM radio mode
i For many operating functions you can also
use the buttons on the multifunction steering 앫 SatRadio mode (컄 page 141)
wheel, e.g. the (, &, $ or % but- 앫 CD-/DVD audio/MP3 mode (“Disc”
tons, for selecting a station or a menu or scroll- and “Memory Card” are described to-
ing through lists (컄 page 21). gether in this guide), (컄 page 156)
앫 Music Register (컄 page 163)
앫 Aux mode (컄 page 173)

132
 Audio
Radio
Radio
Switching to the Radio
왘 Press the b function button.
or
왘 Select Audio£Audio£FM / AM Radio in
the display.
The radio display appears. The last se-
lected station in the last selected wave-
band is heard. Radio display
i Press the button repeatedly to switch wave- 1 Main area with tuning dial
band in the sequence FM, AM, WB (컄 page 135)
and SatRadio mode (컄 page 141). Pressing 2 Memory preset number
again will switch back to FM radio mode. 3 Name of selected station
4 Frequency of selected station
Within the Audio Function 5 WB (Weather band)
6 WB (Weather band)
왘 Select Audio £ FM / AM Radio. 7 AM radio
The radio display appears. The last se- 8 FM radio
lected station in the last selected wave- 9 Stored station list
band is heard. a Radio functions

133
Audio
Radio
Submenu Overview

Radio (FM and AM only) Presets (FM and AM only) Channel (WB only) Sound
Enter Frequency Autostore List of receivable channels Treble
D Show Station information List of stored stations Bass
(only FM)
Balance/Fader
Surround sound

134
 Audio
Radio
왘 Press G or H on the COMAND Tuning to a Station via the Station
Switching Wavebands
control unit. Memory
You can switch the radio between the FM,
AM, and WB wavebands. The search proceeds upwards or down- 왘 Select Presets in the radio display.
wards and stops at the next receivable
왘 Select FM , AM or WB in the radio display. station. or
The last selected station in the select- 왘 Press C when the main area is high-
ed waveband is heard. Tuning to a Station via Manual lighted.
Frequency Input
i In the WB waveband, COMAND displays the The station memory appears. The
Channel name instead of the station names 왘 Select Radio £ Enter Frequency in the dotR in front of a preset indicates that
and/or frequency. radio display. the currently tuned station is stored
or An input menu appears. there.
왘 Press the b function button on the 왘 To select a station:
or
control unit repeatedly until the desired Press % or $.
왘 Press ó on the control unit.
band is selected. 왘 To tune to a station: Press C.
왘 To enter a frequency: Press number
i Press the button repeatedly to switch wave- or
band in the sequence of FM, AM, WB and buttons on the control unit.
SatRadio mode (컄 page 143). Pressing again will i You can only select numbers that are cur- 왘 Press a number key, e.g. 4, on the
switch back to FM radio mode. rently permissible. control unit.

Tuning to a Station COMAND will tune to the frequency en- Wavebands Frequency
tered.
You can tune to a station via station search AM 530 - 1710 kHz
or by manual frequency input. i If in the FM or AM wavebands you enter a
frequency outside the frequency sub-range, CO- FM 87.7 - 107.9 MHz
Tuning to a Station via Station Search MAND will select the next frequency down.
WB (Weather Band) Weather channels
왘 Press ( or & when the main
area is highlighted.
or

135
Audio
Radio
Storing Stations or Switching to Weather Band
There are 10 presets available for FM, AM 왘 Press and hold a number key, e.g. 왘 Press % to highlight the submenu.
and SatRadio wavebands. 4, until a signal tone sounds.
왘 To select the weather band:
The station is stored. Press ( or & until WB is highlight-
Storing Stations Manually
ed.
Storing via Autostore
왘 Press C when the main area is high- 왘 Press C.
lighted. i The function automatically assigns receiv-
or able stations to the presets, sorted according to
reception quality. The stations which were
왘 Select Presets in the radio display. stored in the station memory manually are over-
In both cases, the station memory will written.
appear. The dotRin front of a preset 왘 Press C when the main area is active.
indicates that the currently tuned sta-
왘 Select Autostore.
tion is stored there.
or
왘 Select Presets £ Autostore in the radio
display.
COMAND searches for receivable sta- 1 Main area with tuning dial
tions. A corresponding message is dis- 2 Currently received channel
played. The available stations are 3 Sound settings
automatically stored under the presets. 4 Weather band
5 AM radio
Cancelling Autostore Procedure 6 FM radio
왘 Select Cancel. 7 Channel list
Station memory
왘 To store a station to a selected pre-
set: Press and hold C until a signal
tone sounds.

136
 Audio
HD Radio™ Broadcasting
Searching a Channel 왘 To select a channel: Press ( or HD Radio™ Broadcasting
&.
왘 Press ( or & when the main
왘 To tune to the selected channel: Important Notes
area is highlighted.
Press C. In the section HD Radio™ Broadcasting
or you will find detailed information about
or
왘 Press G or H on the control unit. 앫 the special features of HD Radio that
왘 Press a number key, e.g. 4, on the
The search proceeds upwards or down- distinguish it from analog AM and FM
control unit at any time.
wards and stops at the next receivable radio
channel. 앫 selecting an HD Radio station
Selecting a Channel from Channel List 앫 displaying program information.
왘 Press % to highlight the submenu. i Optional HD Radio equipment is required for
HD Radio operation. A special subscription, how-
왘 To call up the channel list: ever, is not necessary.
Press ( or & until Channel is high- i HD Radio™ Brodcasting features include
lighted.
앫 digital broadcasts in the same waveband
왘 Press C. as analog AM/FM; the analog AM/FM
The channel list appears. stations remain at their current place on
the dial
앫 the ability to broadcast multiple program
streams over a single FM frequency
(e. g. HD1, HD2, etc.).
앫 static-free, clear reception
앫 FM stations offer CD quality sound, AM
stations sound like analog FM stations
앫 a variety of data services, including text-
based information – artist name, song ti-
tle, etc. – shown on the display. 컄컄

137
Audio
HD Radio™ Broadcasting
More information on HD Radio™ Broad- Switching to HD Radio HD Radio Display
casting you will find at
http://www.hdradio.com. i Since HD Radio stations are embedded in
the AM/FM waveband, HD Radio operation is
i Note that subprograms and program info very similar to analog AM/FM radio operation. In
shown in illustrations are dependent on program this chapter only the functions that differ from
content delivered by the radio stations. Program the normal FM radio functions are described
content is subject to change. Therefore, subpro- separately.
grams and program info shown in illustrations
and descriptions contained in this manual may Analog AM/FM radio operation is de-
differ from the subprograms and program info scribed in chapter “Radio” (컄 page 133).
delivered by the radio station. You will only hear HD Radio programs if the
HD Radio function is activated in the radio
submenu. 1 Main area with station or frequency
왘 Select Radio£HD Radio in the radio dis- 2 Memory preset number
play. 3 Name of selected station with HD sym-
If the checkbox Ç is checked, HD Ra- bol and program number
dio is activated. 4 Station frequency
5 Sound settings
6 FM, AM or WB radio
7 Program info
8 Stored station list
9 Radio functions

138
 Audio
HD Radio™ Broadcasting
Submenu Overview

Radio Presets Info FM Sound

Enter Frequency Autostore Program Information FM Treble
D Show Station information List of stored stations AM Bass
D HD Radio WB Balance/Fader
Surround sound

139
Audio
HD Radio™ Broadcasting
Switching Wavebands Tuning to a station Switching to Weather Band
You can switch the radio between the FM, You can tune to an HD Radio station in the 왘 Select FM £WB in the HD Radio display.
AM, and WB wavebands. same way as you would tune to a normal 왘 Press C.
왘 Select FM £ FM , AM or WB in the radio dis- FM Radio station (컄 page 135).
For searching and selecting stations
play. i An HD Radio station can transmit several please refer to (컄 page 136).
programs over one frequency. The individual pro-
The last selected station in the select-
grams are marked by HD1, HD2, ... as suffix to
ed waveband is heard. the station name. The displayed station frequen-
or cy remains the same for all programs that belong
왘 Press the b function button on the to the same station.
control unit repeatedly until the desired Storing Stations
band is selected.
Please refer to “Storing Stations” in the Ra-
i Press the button repeatedly to switch wave- dio section (컄 page 136).
band in the sequence of FM, AM, WB and
SatRadio mode (컄 page 143). Pressing again will Displaying Program Info
switch back to FM radio mode.
왘 Select Info in the radio display.
Information on the program currently
tuned to is displayed. The content and
scope of the information depends on
the HD Radio station.

140
 Audio
Satellite Radio
Satellite Radio i Note that categories and channels shown in i SIRIUS Satellite Radio provides over 130
illustrations are dependent on programming con- channels of digital-quality radio, including 100%
Important Notes tent delivered by the service provider. Program- commercial-free music, sports, news and enter-
In chapter “Satellite radio”, you will find ming content is subject to change. Therefore, tainment.
detailed information regarding channel and categories shown in illustrations SIRIUS Satellite Radio uses a fleet of high-power
and descriptions contained in this manual may satellites to broadcast 24 hours per day, coast-
앫 selecting a station and a program cate- differ from the channels and categories deliv-
gory to-coast, in the contiguous U.S.
ered by the service provider.
앫 memory functions This diverse, satellite-delivered programming is
Satellite radio service may be unavailable or in- available for a monthly subscription fee. For
앫 sound adjustments terrupted from time to time for a variety of rea- more information, call the SIRIUS Service Center
sons, such as environmental or topographic (컄 page 142) or contact www.sirius.com (USA)
If you have not done so already, please fa- conditions and other things we can’t control.
miliarize yourself with these functions by or www.siriuscanada.com (Canada).
Service might also not be available in certain
reading chapter “At a glance”. places (e.g., in tunnels, parking garages, or with-
i Optional satellite radio equipment and a in or next to buildings) or near other technolo-
subscription to satellite radio service provider gies.
are required for the satellite radio operation de-
scribed here.

141
Audio
Satellite Radio
Subscribing After the connection is made:
왘 Follow the instructions given by the op-
Subscribing to Satellite Radio erator.
To switch to satellite radio operation: The activation process may take up to
10 minutes. If it is successful, you will
From Another Main Function see the display with the message
왘Select Audio£Audio£SatRadio. Acquiring Signal... (컄 page 143) fol-
i If radio mode was active last, you only need lowed by the Satellite radio main menu
to select Audio. (컄 page 143).
i If a subscription is not included with system
Within the Audio Function Service information display purchase, credit card information is required to
왘 Select Audio£SatRadio. 1 Phone number of the provider, activate your account.
The Satellite radio main menu will ap- (SIRIUS) or Call Service Provider
pear and displays the Weather channel. 2 SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver
You cannnot select any other station. 왘 Contact satellite radio service provider
왘 Select SatRadio (from the submenu) £ at the telephone number displayed in
Service. the screen.
The Service information display will ap- i It is also possible to activate the satellite
pear. service online. To do so please visit SIRIUS Sat-
ellite Radio’s website at www.sirius.com (USA)
or www.siriuscanada.com (Canada)

142
 Audio
Satellite Radio
Satellite Radio Operation
i For many operating functions you can also
use the buttons on the multifunction steering
wheel, e.g. the (, &, $ or % but-
tons, for selecting a channel or a menu or scroll-
ing through lists (컄 page 21).

Switching On
See “Subscribing to satellite radio” for im-
portant subscription information
(컄 page 142). The message will appear at start up or Satellite radio main menu
when the signal is not available. 1 SatRadio main display
From Another Main Function
After the COMAND acquires the signal, the 2 Channel name
왘 Select Audio £Audio£SatRadio. Satellite radio display will appear. The sta- 3 Memory preset number
i If radio mode was active last, you only need tion last tuned to will begin to play. 4 Selected category/channel number
to select Audio. 5 Channel info (short)
6 Sound settings
Within the Audio Function 7 Category list
왘 Select Audio£SatRadio. 8 Channel info (detailed)
9 Preset channel list
a SatRadio menu
i You can display 5 in full:
앫 Channel info (컄 page 146)

143
Audio
Satellite Radio
Changing the Category Selecting a Channel SatRadio Menu
Satellite radio stations are split up into cat- You can use the following functions: 왘 On the submenu bar press ( or
egories. You can select between various & until SatRadio is highlighted.
앫 Channel search
categories such as News/Talk, Sports and 왘 Press C.
Country, if available. The category list is 앫 Channel selection via direct entry
sorted alphabetically. (컄 page 144)
앫 Selecting a channel from the SatRadio
Selecting a Category channel list (컄 page 145)
왘 To call up the category list: 앫 Selection from the preset menu
Press ( or & until Category is (컄 page 146)
highlighted in the submenu
왘 Press C. Channel Search
The category list appears. 왘 Press ( or & when the SatRadio
main display is highlighted.
왘 To select a category:
Press % or $. or The SatRadio menu appears.
왘 To set the selected category: 왘 Press G or H on the control unit.
Entering a Channel Number Directly
Press C. The search proceeds upwards or down-
wards and stops at the next channel in 왘 Select SatRadio£Enter Channel in the
The selected category will appear in
the selected category. SatRadio menu.
the display. The channel last tuned to in
the new category will begin to play. An input dialog appears.
At the beginning of the category list the or
category All Channels will appear. This 왘 Press ó on the control unit.
category is sorted numerically (by
왘 To enter a channel: Press correspond-
channel numbers) and allows you to
scroll through all available channels. ing number buttons on the control unit.

144
 Audio
Satellite Radio
i You can only select numbers that are cur- Memory Functions
rently permissible.
i There are 10 presets available.
COMAND will tune to the channel en- You can use the following functions:
tered.
앫 Saving channels manually
Selecting a Channel from the SatRadio 앫 Selecting a channel from the Satellite
Channel List preset memory (컄 page 146)
왘 Select SatRadio£Channel List in the
SatRadio menu. Storing Channels Manually
The channel list appears. 왘 Press C when the main area is high-
lighted. Station memory
왘 To select a channel: Press % or
$. or 왘 To select a preset: Press % or
왘 Select Presets on the SatRadio sub- $.
왘 To tune to the selected channel:
Press C. menu bar. 왘 To store a channel to a selected pre-
In both cases, the channel memory will set: Press and hold C until a signal
appear. The dotRin front of a preset tone sounds.
indicates that the currently tuned chan- or
nel is stored there. 왘 Press and hold a number key, e.g.
4, until a signal tone sounds.
The channel is stored.

145
Audio
Satellite Radio
Selecting a Channel from the Memory Displaying Service Information
List
You can call the provider service center for
왘 To call up the channel list: questions or releases whenever you need.
In the submenu press ( or & un- 왘 Select SatRadio£Service in the SatRa-
til Presets is highlighted. dio submenu.
The presets list appears. The service information appears.
왘 To select a channel: Press % or
$.
왘 To tune to the selected channel:
Press C. 1 Category
or 2 Channel
3 Artist
왘 Press a number key, e.g. 4, on the 4 Song title
control unit.
You will see (if available)
Displaying Information 앫 the full name
왘 In the submenu press ( or & un- 앫 additional information
til Info is highlighted. 1 Phone number of the provider,
Switching back to the SatRadio main dis- (SIRIUS) or Call Service Provider
왘 Press C. play: 2 SIRIUS ID of your satellite receiver
Information about the current program 왘 Press ( or &. 왘 Press ( or & to switch back to
appears.
the SatRadio main display.

146
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Channel List Updates Sound Settings CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
While receiving a new channel list the mes- Refer to chapter At a glance on how to ad- Safety Instructions
sage Updating Channels will appear. just sound settings.
The channel last tuned will be muted until 앫 Volume (컄 page 31) G Warning
the update is completed. You cannot oper- 앫 Balance control and fader (컄 page 32) COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser
ate the satellite radio.
앫 Bass and treble control (컄 page 32) product. You must not open the casing.
After completion of the update, the There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
Satellite radio main menu will appear. 앫 Surround sound (컄 page 34) radiation if you open the casing, or if the
The channel last tuned to will begin to play. casing is faulty or damaged.
COMAND does not contain any parts that
you are able to maintain yourself. For safety
reasons, all maintenance work must be car-
ried out by qualified technicians.

G Warning
Only carry out the following when the vehi-
cle is stationary:
앫 Inserting a disc
앫 Ejecting a disc
There is a risk of accident by being distract-
ed from road and traffic conditions if you
load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is in mo-
tion.

147
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Notes on MP3 Mode Similarly, if the first session contains MP3 Please note the following when assigning
tracks and the second session contains track names:
Permissible Storage Media data in audio CD format, COMAND handles 앫 Track names must contain at least one
the CD as an MP3 CD. Only the MP3 tracks character.
앫 CD-R and CD-RW can be accessed.
앫 DVD+R and DVD+RW 앫 Track names must have the extension
File Structure of Storage Medium “mp3”.
앫 DVD-R and DVD-RW
When creating an MP3 storage medium, 앫 A period must appear between the
앫 SD card (컄 page 152)
you can organize MP3 tracks into folders. track name and the extension.
Permissible File Systems A folder can also contain additional fold- i COMAND does not support ID3 tags.
ers. A storage medium may have a maxi-
앫 ISO9660/Joliet for CD storage media mum of 255 folders in total. A maximum of Permissible Formats
앫 UDF for DVDs 255 tracks and 255 folders are permissible COMAND supports the following formats:
per folder. A maximum of 1200 tracks in
앫 FAT16 for SD card with storage medi- 앫 MPEG1 audio layer 1 format
total are permissible per storage medium.
um
i In everyday speech, this format has been re-
Track Names and Folder Names placed by the designation “MP3”.
Multisession CDs
On multisession CDs, the content of the
When creating an MP3 storage medium, 앫 Microsoft Windows® Media Audio V2,
you can assign names to the MP3 tracks V7, V8 und V9 (WMA).
first session determines how COMAND
and to the folders.
handles the CD.
COMAND uses these names in MP3 mode
If the first session, for example, contains
for the corresponding display. Empty fold-
data in audio CD format and the second
ers or folders containing data other than
session contains MP3 tracks, COMAND
MP3 tracks will not be displayed by
handles the CD as a conventional audio
COMAND.
CD. This means that the MP3 tracks can-
not be accessed. If MP3 files are stored in the root directory
itself, the root directory also counts as a
folder. COMAND will then display the root
directory name as a folder name.

148
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Notes on Copyright i Audio DVDs differ from recordable DVD-R WMA (Windows® Media Audio) format of
and DVD-RW discs. the following type:
The music tracks that you can create for
playback in MP3 mode are generally copy- Data on audio DVDs are stored either in 앫 fixed bit rates from 5kBit/s up to
right-protected under applicable interna- uncompressed format or in lossless com- 384 kBit/s
tional and national laws. pressed format. The sound quality on au-
앫 sampling rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
dio DVDs is therefore better than on
In many countries,the reproduction of recordable DVDs that contain MP3 data COMAND does not support WMA files of
copyrighted material is not permitted even because the MP3 format uses a lossy type the following type:
if only for personal use without the express of compression. You cannot delete data 앫 DRM (Digital Rights Management) en-
prior consent of the copyright holder. from or record additional data to commer- crypted files
Please check the current copyright laws cially available, prerecorded audio DVDs.
Please note the following information
i If other music files are stored in these audio
for your country and comply with them. formats on a storage medium, in addition to MP3
about CDs/DVDs and pay special atten- files, the loading process may take longer before
These restrictions do not apply, for exam-
ple, to your own compositions and record- tion to the notes on copied and/or self- the first track is played.
ings or for recordings for which written CDs/DVDs.
authorization has been obtained from the Notes on CD/DVD Discs
Permissible Bit and Scan Rates
copyright holder. i Discs with copy protection do not comply
앫 Fixed and variable bit rates from with the CD audio standard and in some cases
Notes about Audio DVD Discs 32 kbps to 320 kbps cannot be played by COMAND.
When playing copied discs, problems may occur
COMAND can playback commercially 앫 Scan rates from 8 kHz to 48 kHz with the playback.
available, prerecorded audio DVDs that i Only use MP3 tracks with a bit rate of 128
bear the following label. You will usually A wide variety of discs, disc writing software and
kbps or higher and with a scan rate of 44.1 kHz
writers are available. Due to this variety we can-
find the label on the DVD booklet, the inlay or higher. Lower rates may result in impaired
not guarantee that the system will be able to play
or the DVD itself. sound quality. This is particularly true if the sur-
discs that you have written/copied yourself.
round sound function has been activated.
There may be playback problems with user-
burned CDs with a storage capacity of more than
700 MB. These CDs do not meet current valid
standards.
컄컄

149
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
i When playing a DVD audio, it may be the Notes on the Care of Loading CDs and DVDs
case with numerous albums that the last track
CD/DVD Discs
does not contain any music and COMAND
switches to the next track. This is due to the pro- 앫 Only touch the discs at the edges. G Warning
duction method and does not imply a fault with 앫 Handle discs with care in order to pre- Only insert a CD or DVD when the vehicle is
the unit. vent malfunctions during playback. stationary. There is a risk of accident by be-
! Do not attach stickers or labels of any kind 앫 Avoid scratching, leaving fingerprints
ing distracted from road and traffic condi-
to discs. They may come loose and damage tions if you load a CD/DVD while the vehicle
and dust on the discs. is in motion.
COMAND.
COMAND has been designed for discs meeting 앫 Clean the discs occasionally with a Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
the requirements of standard EN 60908. There- commercially available cleaning cloth. (appr. 50 km/h), your vehicle is covering a
fore, only discs with a maximum thickness of Always wipe in a straight line from the distance of 44 feet (appr. 14 m) every
1.3 mm can be used. inside outwards, never in a circular mo- second.
If a thicker disc is inserted, e.g. one which stores tion.
data on both sides, (DVD on one side, audio data i If the CD/DVD is printed on one side, this
앫 The discs must only be labelled using
on the other side), this cannot be ejected and side must face upwards when loaded. If neither
COMAND will be damaged. pens specially designed for this pur-
pose. side is printed, the side to be played must face
Do not use 8 cm diameter discs, not even with an downwards.
adapter. Only use round, 12 cm diameter discs. 앫 After use, put the discs back into the The system may not be able to play copy-protect-
box. ed CDs/DVDs.
i COMAND can play audio CDs with the high-
resolution surround format. 앫 Protect the discs from heat and direct
sunlight.

150
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Loading the DVD Changer 왘 Press a number key e. g. 2. i The loading process may take a while, de-
pending on the type of disc. If you do not insert a
The DVD changer is a magazine with six The DVD changer will switch to the se-
disc, the display will switch back to the Magazine
built-in compartments. lected magazine compartment. The menu after approximately 20 seconds.
message Please Wait... will be dis-
Loading an Individual Magazine Com- played. The DVD changer plays the disc if
partment The message Please Insert Disc <x> will 앫 it has been inserted correctly
왘 Press the Load button Î. be displayed. 앫 it is a permissible disc.
A menu indicates which magazine com- i Only insert a CD after COMAND has prompt-
partments are currently loaded. The ed you to do so with this message. Only insert
highlighted or currently playing com- one CD per magazine compartment.
partment is indicated by a red number.

Magazine menu, one disc loaded

1 Magazine compartment occupied,
ejecting possible
왘 Insert a disc into the slot 1 with the 2 Empty magazine compartment
Magazine menu printed side upwards.
왘 To exit menu: Press the Load button
왘 To select magazine compartment: The DVD changer pulls in the disc and again.
press ( or &. places it in the selected magazine com-
partment. The message Loading Disc <x> or
왘 To start loading: Press C.
will be displayed. 왘 Select Back
or
or
컄컄

151
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
왘 Press the í button. 왘 To end loading procedure: Ejecting CDs and DVDs
Press the Load button Î again.
Filling Empty Magazine Compartments
or G Warning
왘 Press the Load button Î.
왘 Select Back Only eject a disc when the vehicle is station-
The Magazine menu appears. The cur- ary. You may otherwise be distracted from
rently playing compartment is indicat- or
the traffic conditions and could cause an ac-
ed by a red number or, if the magazine 왘 Press the í button. cident.
is empty, compartment 1 is marked.
Loading SD Memory Card
왘 Select Fill Empty Slots.
i COMAND does not support the SD card for- Ejecting from the DVD Changer
The message Please Insert Disc <x> will mat "SD-HC 2.0 Standard". Memory cards with i If you eject a disc while another is being
be displayed. over 2 GB of storage capacity are not supported. played, the DVD changer interrupts playback.
i Only insert a CD after COMAND has prompt- Not all SD memory cards and storage media are Playback will continue once the disc has been
ed you to do so with this message. Only insert designed for the temperatures which may be ejected completely.
one CD per magazine compartment. reached in the vehicle.
Due to the wide range of SD memory cards avail- Ejecting One Disc
왘 Insert a disc into the slot with the print-
ed side upwards. able on the market, playback cannot be guaran- 왘 Press the Eject button.
teed for all brands of SD memory card.
The message Please Wait... will be dis- The Magazine menu appears. The
왘 Push the SD memory card into the slot. magazine compartment with the cur-
played. If the disc has been loaded, the
DVD changer will switch to the next The end with the contacts must be rent disc is highlighted.
empty magazine compartment. The pointing towards the slot.
message Please Insert Disc <x> will be COMAND loads the memory card and
displayed. displays the message Reading memory
왘 Repeat the step until all compartments card.
have been loaded. If no MP3 tracks can be found, a mes-
The DVD changer plays the last loaded sage will be displayed.
disc if it has been inserted correctly
and is permissible.

152
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3

1 Magazine compartment occupied, 왘 Remove the disc from the slot. 왘 Select Eject All.
ejecting possible If you do not remove the disc from the The DVD changer ejects the first disc
2 Disc type slot, the DVD changer will automatical- found. The message Ejecting Disc <x> is
3 Disc name (only if stored on disc) ly pull it back in after a short while and displayed.
4 Current disc begin playback. 왘 Remove the disc from the slot when
왘 To select occupied magazine com- you see the message prompting you to
partment: press ( or &. Ejecting All Discs
do this.
왘 Press C. 왘 Press the Eject button.
The DVD changer switches to the next
The message Ejecting Disc <x> will be The Magazine menu appears. occupied magazine compartment and
displayed. The following message will ejects the disc.
then be displayed. 왘 Repeat the last step until the magazine
is empty.

153
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Ejecting SD Memory Card

왘 Push the SD memory card inwards.

The memory card is ejected.
왘 Remove the memory card from the
slot.

154
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Submenu overview

CD or DVD-A g/h/T Track list Media Sound

or MP3 (DVD audio mode only) (CD and DVD audio
or mode only)
or
Folder
(MP3 mode only)
Normal track sequence g Pause Display track list Media selection via me- Treble
(CD audio and DVD au- dia list (컄 page 158)
dio mode only) 앫 Media Interface
앫 CD/DVD changer
(6 magazine com-
partments)
앫 SD card
앫 HDD
앫 Aux
Random Tracks h Stop Folder list Bass
playback (MP3 mode only)
Random Folder T Restart or resume Balance/Fader
(MP3 only) playback
Switch ‘Read CD data- Surround sound
base’ function on/off
(CD mode only)

155
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Switching to CD Audio, DVD Audio or From Another Main Function Example of CD Audio Mode Display
MP3 왘 Select Audio£Audio£Disc or Memory
왘 Load CD/DVD (컄 page 150) or SD Card or Music Register or Media Interface in
memory card (컄 page 152). the Audio menu (컄 page 132).
COMAND loads the inserted medium i If the required mode was active last, you
only need to select Audio.
and begins playback.
or Within the Audio Function
왘 Press the é function button. 왘 Select Audio£Disc or Memory Card or Mu-
i Pressing the function button switches di- sic Register or Media Interface in the Au-
rectly to the disc mode selected last (CD audio, dio menu.
DVD audio, MP3-CD or DVD video). COMAND i Disc accesses audio discs in the DVD chang- 1 Disc type J
then accesses all discs in the DVD changer, the er, Memory Card selects the SD memory card, Mu- 2 Track number
memory card or the Music Register. sic Register selects the Music Register, Media 3 CD or DVD inserted
Interface selects an external device. 4 Track name (only if stored on disc as
왘 If necessary, select CD/DVD audio/
MP3 media (컄 page 158). 왘 If necessary, select CD/DVD audio/ CD text)
or MP3 media (컄 page 158). 5 Elapsed track time
This switches to the required disc 6 Visual track and time display
왘 When playing a DVD video: Open the 7 Current playback option
media list as described under “Select- mode.
8 Sound settings
ing DVD media” (컄 page 180). 9 Media selection
왘 Select an audio storage medium. a Disc name (only if stored on disc as CD
text)
This switches to the required disc
b Calls up track list
mode.
c Storage medium position in the media
list
d Playback options

156
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Example of DVD Audio Display Example of MP3 Display Stop Function
i The function is only available in DVD audio
mode.
왘 Switch to DVD audio mode.
왘 To interrupt playback: Select h.
The g display changes to T.
왘 To resume playback: Select T.
Playback will then continue at the point
at which it was interrupted.
왘 To stop playback: Press h again
1 Disc type K 1 Disc type L or M
when playback is stopped.
2 Track number 2 Track number
3 CD or DVD inserted 3 CD or DVD inserted or
4 Track name (if available) 4 Track name 왘 Select h twice in immediate succes-
5 Elapsed track time 5 Elapsed track time sion during playback.
6 Visual time and track display 6 Visual time and track display
7 Current playback option 7 Current playback option The option selector remains at T.
8 Sound settings 8 Sound settings 왘 To restart playback: Select T.
9 Media selection 9 Media selection Playback starts from the beginning of
a Disc name (if available) a Current folder the DVD.
b Calls up track list b Calls up folder list
c Stop function c Storage medium position in the media
d Pause function list
e Storage medium position in the media d Playback options
list i An example of a media list display can be
f Playback options found on (컄 page 158).

157
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Pause Function Selecting CD/DVD/MP3 Media The media list shows you the storage me-
dia currently available:
왘 In CD audio, DVD audio and MP3
In CD Audio, DVD Audio and 앫 In the DVD changer (magazine com-
MP3 Mode mode: Select Media.
partments 1 to 6)
or
왘 To activate playback pause: The following storage media can be
Briefly press F. 왘 In CD audio and DVD audio mode read:
only: Press C when the main area is
X appears at the top left of the status highlighted. J CD audio, L MP3-CD or MP3-DVD,
bar. K DVD audio and I DVD video
The media list appears. The
왘 To resume playback: Briefly press dotR indicates the medium currently i If a storage medium is not readable, an entry
F again. playing. appears next to the magazine compartment or a
message is displayed when the memory card is
X disappears.
selected.
In DVD Audio Mode Only 앫 SD memory card M at position 7
왘 To activate playback pause: 앫 Music Register N at position 8
Switch to DVD audio mode. 왘 To select storage medium: Press
왘 Select g. % or $.
The g display changes to T. 왘 Press C.
왘 To resume playback: i If you select a video DVD I, then this
Switch to DVD audio mode. switches the unit to video mode (컄 page 179).
왘 Select T. Media list
The T display changes to g.

158
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
왘 In MP3 mode: Press C when the main
Selecting Tracks Selecting Folders
area is highlighted.
i For many operating functions you can also i The function is only available in MP3 mode.
use the buttons on the multifunction steering The track list appears. The dotRindi-
왘 Switch to MP3 mode (컄 page 156).
wheel, e.g. the (, &, $ or % but- cates the current track.
tons, for selecting a track or a menu or scrolling 왘 To select a track: Press % or $. 왘 Select Folder.
through lists (컄 page 21). or
왘 Press C.
Selection via Track Skip i In MP3 mode the list displays all tracks in al- 왘 Press C when the main area is high-
phabetical order. lighted.
왘 To skip forwards or backwards to a
track: Press ( or & when the The folder list appears.
Fast Forward/Reverse
main area is highlighted.
왘 Press and hold ( or & until the
or desired point is reached when the main
왘 Press G or H. area is highlighted.
i ‘Forward track skip’ skips to the next track. or
‘Backward track skip’ skips to the beginning of 왘 Press and hold G or H on the
the current track, if the track has been playing control unit until the desired point is
for more than 8 seconds. If the track has been
reached.
playing for less than 8 seconds, it will skip to the
beginning of the previous track.
If the playback option “Random Tracks” is
switched on, the track sequence is random. 1 Back folder symbol
2 Current track
Selecting via Track List 3 Track symbol
4 Current folder name
왘 In CD audio/DVD audio mode: Select
Track List.
컄컄
or

159
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
왘 To switch to the next folder up: Se- 왘 To select a folder: Press % or Gracenote Media Database
lect theQsymbol. $.
i The function is only available in CD audio
The display changes to the next folder 왘 Press C. mode.
up. The tracks of the folder appear. CD information including album title, artist
왘 To select a track: Press % or $. name, and track name is obtained from the
Gracenote® Media Database. A version of
왘 Press C. the Gracenote® Media Database is stored
The track is played, the corresponding on the COMAND’s hard drive. Access to
folder is now the active folder. this database is indicated by the
Gracenote logo being displayed in the low-
er right of some audio displays.

1 Disc name (if stored on disc)

2 Current folder
3 Folder symbol

160
 Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Many audio CDs contain CD text. Updating the Gracenote® Media
COMAND uses the information contained Database
in this text for displaying the name of the
artist, album and track. As new music CD releases occur it is nec-
cessary to update the Gracenote Media
If the audio CD does not contain any CD Database. Optimum Gracenote®
text, COMAND can recognise unknown music recognition function is only
audio tracks in CD audio mode with the aid achieved when the most up-to-date data-
of the Gracenote Media Database. For this base is available in your vehicle.
to happen, the corresponding information
must be stored in the Gracenote Media You can have the music recognition soft-
Database and the “Read CD Database” ware updated at an Authorized Mercedes-
function must be switched on. Switching ‘Read CD Database’ Function Benz center by means of a DVD or perform
On and Off the update process yourself.
If this is the case, COMAND provides the
corresponding data, such as name of art- 왘 Switching to CD audio mode i The Gracenote® Media Database is updated
(컄 page 156). at the same time as the map software
ist, album and track, in the corresponding
(컄 page 47).
displays and lists. 왘 Select CD£Read CD Database.
If COMAND accesses the Gracenote Media Depending on the previous status, the
Database while reading an audio CD, the function will be switched off C or on D.
following information is displayed:

161
Audio
CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3
Setting Audio Format Playback Options 왘 Select CD or DVD-A or MP3.
It is only possible to set the audio format in The following options are available: The Options list appears. A dotRindi-
DVD audio mode. The number of available cates the activated option.
앫 Normal Track Sequence
audio formats is dependent on the DVD. You will hear the tracks in the normal 왘 Select an option.
The content of an audio DVD is called the sequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.). The option is activated. A correspond-
“album”, which can be divided into a maxi-
앫 Random Tracks ing display will appear in the main area
mum of nine groups. A group may contain,
You will hear the tracks in random or- for all options except Normal Track Se-
for example, music of different sound qual-
der (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.). quence.
ities (stereo and multi-channel formats) or
bonus tracks. Each group can include up to 앫 Folder (only in MP3 mode) i The option Normal Track Sequence is automat-
99 tracks. If a DVD audio only comprises The tracks in the currently active folder ically activated if you change the medium which
one audio format, the “Group” menu is currently being played or if you select another
and any subfolders are heard in ran-
item(s) cannot be selected. medium. An activated option remains active af-
dom order.
ter COMAND is switched on or off.
왘 Switch to DVD audio mode 왘 To select an option: Switch to CD au-
(컄 page 156). dio, DVD audio or MP3 mode
왘 Select DVD-A£Group. (컄 page 156).
The list of available audio formats ap-
pears. A dotRindicates the format
currently selected.
왘 To change setting: Press % or
$.
왘 Press C.
왘 To exit menu: Press ( or &.

162
 Audio
Music Register
Music Register Switching to Music Register
You can store MP3 and WMA files in the From Another Main Function
Music Register. The memory capacity is 4
GB. 왘 Select Audio£Audio£Music Register
! Keep your original music files in a safe in the display with Audio menu
place. A fault with the COMAND may cause the (컄 page 132).
music files stored in the Music Register to be i If Music Register was active last, you only
lost. Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC is not liable for need to select Audio.
any loss of data.
Within the Audio Function
Example display: Music Register
왘 Select Audio£Music Register.
1 Storage media type - Music Register
The Music Register is loaded. The Mu-
N
sic Register display appears.
2 Track number
No music files available: 3 CD or DVD inserted
A message will be displayed. 4 Track name
5 Elapsed track time
왘 First copy music files to the Music 6 Visual time and track display
Register (컄 page 164). 7 Current playback option
Music files available: 8 Sound settings
You will hear the first track of the first 9 Media selection
folder found or playback will start from a Folder functions
the point listened to last. b Current folder
c Storage medium position in the media
list
d Calls up Music Register menu

163
Audio
Music Register
Copying Music Files into the Music Selecting Tracks to Be Copied Selecting a Destination Folder
Register
Selecting All Tracks 왘 Press ( or & until Destination
i CD information, including album, title, artist Folder is highlighted.
name and track name is obtained from the 왘 Switch the check box next to All Tracks
왘 Press C.
Gracenote® Media Database (컄 page 160). on.
왘 In the Music Register submenu select The check boxes of All Tracks and of all
Copy Music Files. tracks in the list are checked.
The Media List menu appears on the Selecting Individual Tracks
submenu.
왘 Select individual tracks to be copied by
switching the check mark next to each
track entry on or off.

1 Create new folder (default)

2 Existing folders
3 Currently active folder
왘 To select folder:
Press % or $.
왘 To select medium: Press % or 왘 Press C.
$ until desired medium is selected.
i If you do not select a destination folder be-
왘 Press C. 1 Copy all tracks fore copying, a new folder will be created.
If the medium contains files that can be 2 Option for selecting individual tracks
copied, a track list appears. 3 Confirm selection
왘 To confirm selection: Select Continue.
The Copy menu appears.

164
 Audio
Music Register
Start the Copying Deleting all Music Files Folder Functions
왘 Press ( or & until Start is high- This function can be used to delete all the You can view the content of the Music Reg-
lighted. music files in the Music Register. ister, change folder/track names and de-
왘 Press C. ! The deleting process can take a few min- lete individual folders/tracks.
In the display information about
utes. Please do not operate COMAND during the 왘 Select Folder in the submenu.
deleting process.
source, destination and progress of the
copying is shown. 왘 Select Music Register£Delete All Music
Files.
i The Disc menu re-appears automatically af-
ter a sucessful copying. A prompt appears. No is highlighted.
왘 Do not delete: Press C.
The Music Register menu appears.
왘 To delete: Select Yes.
A corresponding message appears.
Requesting Memory Space 1 Back folder symbol
Information 2 Music file symbol
왘 Select Music Register£Memory Info. 3 Current folder
A window appears containing informa- or
왘 To stop the copying: Press ( or tion on: 왘 Press C when the main area is high-
& until Cancel is highlighted. 앫 Memory capacity lighted.
왘 Press C. 앫 Available memory A similar list appears that also shows
The Disc menu re-appears. 앫 Occupied memory the content of the music register.
앫 Content (folders, tracks)
컄컄

165
Audio
Music Register
왘 To switch to the next folder up: Se- i The option Normal Track Sequence is automat-
Playback Options
lect theQsymbol. ically activated if you change the medium which
The following options are available:
The display changes to the next folder is currently being played or if you select another
up. 앫 Normal Track Sequence medium. An activated option remains active af-
You will hear the tracks in the normal ter COMAND is switched on or off.
Changing Folder/Track Name sequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).
왘 Select Folder. 앫 Random Tracks
The tracks are played in random order.
왘 To select a folder/track: Press %
or $. 앫 Random Folder
The tracks of the currently active folder
왘 Select Options£Change. and any subfolders are heard in ran-
왘 Enter a name for the folder/track in the dom order.
input line. 왘 To select an option: Switch to Music
왘 To save change: Select B. Register (컄 page 163).

Deleting Folder/Track 왘 Select Music Register in the submenu.

The Options list appears. A dotRindi-
왘 Select Folder. cates the activated option.
왘 To select a folder/track: Press % 왘 Select an option.
or $.
The option is activated. A correspond-
왘 Select Options£Delete. ing display will appear in the main area
A prompt appears. No is highlighted. for all options except Normal Track Se-
quence.
왘 Do not delete: Press C.
왘 To delete: Select Yes and press C.
A message appears.

166
 Audio
Media Interface
Media Interface Supported USB Devices Special Notes on USB Devices
The following USB devices are supported: 앫 In order to keep the initialisation time
Important Notes short, do not store data other than mu-
앫 USB sticks (flash memory)
Connection Options sic files on the USB device.
앫 USB hard disks (1 inch, 1.8 inch and
앫 Up to eight directory levels with up to
Via the UCI connection (Universal Con- 2.5 inch drives) with a starting/contin-
uous current rating of maximum 1,000 tracks are supported.
sumer Interface) you can connect the fol-
lowing media to COMAND: 800 mA (otherwise a separate power 앫 Do not use a USB extension cable or
supply will be needed). adapter. These may impair functional-
앫 iPod
앫 a subset of MP3 players which were ity.
앫 MP3 player loaded in the so-called MTP mode us- 앫 Playlists are searched for in the back-
앫 USB devices ing Windows® Media Player. ground on the USB device and, if avail-
i The media Interface supports storage media able, are offered beside folders in a
Supported iPod Versions separate category.
of “USB device subclass 6” and a subset of MTP
The following iPod device versions are fully MP3 players. Information on “USB Device Sub- i Files protected with DRM (Digital Rights
supported: class 6” you will obtain from the manufacturer. Management) are not supported by the Media In-
앫 iPod Mini terface.
Supported Data Formats (USB Devices)
앫 iPod nano 1G Connecting External Devices
The following data formats are supported:
앫 iPod nano 4G You will find the UCI connection socket in
앫 mp3: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kBit/s) the glove compartment.
앫 iPod nano 5G
앫 wma: CBR, VBR (up to 320 kBit/s) Never connect more than one device at a
time. Please consult a Mercedes-Benz Ser-
vice Center for further information.

167
Audio
Media Interface
i Do not leave external devices in the vehicle, If you remove a device, the No device con- Switching to Media Interface Opera-
as functionality cannot be guaranteed above cer- nected message appears.
tion
tain temperatures (such as inside a vehicle in di- i The iPod or MP3 player connected should 왘 Press the é function button.
rect sunlight). Mercedes-Benz does not take not be operated with a remote control (such as a
responsibility for any damage to external devic- Bluetooth remote control) while it is being oper- This switches on the previous disc op-
es. ated with Media Interface, as this could cause erating mode.
unforeseen technical difficulties. i If you previously selected operation with
i The start-up time may be extended if you Media Interface, it will now be switched on.
connect an iPod or MP3 player which has a fully 왘 Press number key Õ function button.
discharged battery.
This will select the connected audio de-
i Error messages appear while the device is vice.
being activated if:
or
앫 COMAND does not support the device
connected 왘 Select Media.
앫 the device connected consumes too The media list appears. The
much power dotRindicates the current medium
1 Connection socket for 1/8 inch jack 앫 the Media Interface connection is defec- being played.
plug, for MP3 players, for example. tive 왘 Press the $ or the % button re-
2 iPod plug for connecting iPod If necessary, consult a Mercedes-Benz Ser- peatedly until position 0 in the media
3 USB socket for connecting USB device vice Center. list is highlighted.
4 Example device: iPod
i If no device is connected, you will see the
왘 Connect the external device using the entry Media Interface instead of a device name.
appropriate connection 1, 2 or 3. If COMAND does not support the device con-
Never connect more than one device at nected, the entry Not available appears.
a time. Otherwise, you will not be able
to play the external device.
COMAND activates the device.

168
 Audio
Media Interface
COMAND activates a connected device. i If the device connected does not contain i Skipping forwards skips to the next track.
You will see a message to this effect. The any playable tracks, a message appears to this Skipping backwards skips to the beginning of the
effect. current track if the track has been playing for
basic display then appears. more than 8 seconds. If the track has been play-
Within the Audio Function ing for less than 8 seconds, it skips to the start
of the previous track. If you have selected a play-
왘 Connect an external device back option other than Normal track sequence,
(컄 page 167). the track sequence is random.
COMAND activates the device. The ba-
sic display appears. Selecting by Manual Track Number En-
try
or
왘 Select Audio£Media Interface 왘 To make an entry: press the Í but-
ton.
i You can tell which type of device 1 has
been connected by the corresponding icons for An input menu appears. The number of
Example display: iPod operation iPod, MP3 player or USB mass storage device. possible input digits depends on the
number of tracks stored.
1 Device Type Selecting Music Files
2 Track number 왘 To enter a track number: press a
3 Track name
i COMAND displays the data stored on the number key, e.g. 7.
iPod, MP3 player or USB mass storage device as
4 Visual elapsed track time it is stored in the connected medium. The number is entered in the first posi-
5 Numeric elapsed track time (also in for- tion in the input line.
mat 00:00:00 for audio books) Selecting by Skipping to a Track i If an invalid number is entered, COMAND
6 Visual track display will ignore it and it will not be displayed.
7 Current playback option 왘 To skip forwards or backwards to a
8 Sound settings track: press the & or ( button. 왘 Enter more numbers if desired.
9 Media list or 왘 To confirm your entry: press the C
a Album name, if available button.
왘 Press the H or G button.
b Categories, playlists and/or folders
c Artist, if available The selected track is played.
d Playback options

169
Audio
Media Interface
Fast Forward/Rewind 앫 Composers Selecting a Category and Opening a
i Some playback categories contain the entry Folder
왘 When the main area is highlighted,
press and hold the & or ( but- All. When this entry has been selected, the en- 왘 To open a category list/folder: press
tire content of the category selected will be
ton until you reach the desired posi- the C button when the main area is
played.
tion. highlighted.
or USB Devices or
왘 Press and hold the H or G but- For USB mass storage devices, you can se- 왘 Select Music.
ton until you reach the desired posi- lect folders and also playlists (if available). You will see the available categories or
tion. COMAND can also display the album name the folder content (e.g. other folders).
and artist ("metadata") during playback, if The category selected or the folder
Selecting a Category/Playlist/ this information was previously entered name is in the status bar of the display.
Folder into the system.
i The menu option Music is not yet available
iPods and MP3 Players Playlists are shown in the display with a while the device is being activated.
particular icon. When you open the playlist,
You can select tracks for iPod and MP3 the corresponding tracks are opened and
players with categories and folders. playback begins. Now Random categories is
Categories can include: available as a playback option instead of
앫 Current tracklist Random folder.

앫 Playlists (e.g. All, My top 25 or Music For USB mass storage devices, you can de-
videos) termine whether metadata from the tags in
the coded music data should be displayed
앫 Artists or whether the file name and directory
앫 Albums should be displayed during playback.
앫 Podcasts 왘 Select Media Interface.£Display Metada-
ta
1 Device name and device icon
앫 Audiobooks 2 Selectable categories
앫 Genres

170
 Audio
Media Interface
왘 To select a category/folder: press The track is played. Alphabetical Track Selection
the button % or $and confirm by or
pressing the button C. iPods and MP3 Players
왘 Select an album or folder and confirm
You will see the content of the selected this by holding down the C button. i This function is available for categories
category or selected folder. which are arranged in alphabetical order. This
You see the Please wait... message. Af-
i You may see the Please wait... message
ter that, the first track of the album/
function is not available for albums or playlists,
beforehand. for example.
folder is played.
왘 If necessary, repeat this operating step 왘 Select a category, e.g. artists.
왘To switch to the next-highest folder:
until the tracks in the selected folder/ The available artists appear.
select theQicon.
album appear.
i The Q icon is always listed right at the 왘 Press the corresponding number key
top of the folder in question. once or repeatedly to select the initial
letter of the desired artist. For exam-
Playing the Content of a Category or ple, to select an artist whose name be-
Folder gins with C, press the number key 2
왘 Select a category or folder. three times.
왘 Press the C button for longer than two You see the available letters at the bot-
seconds. tom edge of the display.
The content of the category or folder 왘 Press the C button.
selected is played in accordance with After a message, the first entry in the
the playback option selected list which matches the letter entered is
1 Icon for next-higher folder (컄 page 172). highlighted.
2 Current category
3 Track icon i If there is no entry which matches the letter
4 Current track which has been entered, the last entry in the list
which matches a previous letter is highlighted.
왘 To select a track: press the button
% or $and confirm by pressing
the button C.

171
Audio
Media Interface
USB Mass Storage Devices Selecting an Active Partition (for Playback Options
i This function is available for folders which USB Mass Storage Devices Only) The following options are available:
are arranged in alphabetical order. This function You can select this function for USB mass 앫 Normal Track Sequence
is not available for playlists. storage devices when the storage device is You hear the tracks in their normal or-
왘 Press the number key in question once partitioned. Up to four partitions (primary der (numerical or alphabetical).
or repeatedly in a folder to select the or logical and FAT-formatted) are support-
ed. 앫 Random Tracks
initial letter of the desired artist.
You hear all tracks in random order.
For example, to select an artist whose i The Windows formatting program supports
FAT partitions of up to 32 GB as standard. 앫 Random Categories or Random Folder (in the
name begins with C, press the number
case of USB devices when Folder has
key 2 three times. 왘 Select Media Interface£Select Active been selected)
You see the available letters at the bot- Partition. You hear the tracks in the current ac-
tom edge of the display. tive category or folder and any sub-
If the folder only contains folders, CO- folders in random order.
MAND searches for folders. After a mes- 왘 To select an option: Select Media Inter-
sage, the first entry in the list which face in the basic display.
matches the letter entered is highlighted.
The option list appears. ARdot indi-
If this does not happen, COMAND search-
cates the option selected.
es for tracks. After a message, the first en-
try in the list which matches the letter 왘 Select an option.
entered is highlighted.

172
 Audio
Audio Aux
Audio Aux Within the Audio Function The following settings can be made in Au-
dio Aux mode:
An external audio source (AUX) can be 왘 Select Audio£Aux.
connected to COMAND via the 1/8" jack 앫 Volume (컄 page 31)
The Audio Aux menu appears.
1 located inside the glovebox. The medium in the external audio 앫 Balance and fader (컄 page 32)
source is heard, provided it is connect- 앫 Treble and bass (컄 page 32)
ed and switched to playback.
앫 Surround sound (컄 page 34)

GWarning
Due to the different volumes of the external
audio sources, system messages (e.g. navi-
gation announcements) may be much loud-
er. You may need to disable these system
messages or adjust the volume of these
messages manually (컄 page 31).
Switching to Audio Aux
i The volume of external audio sources is ex-
From Another Main Function i Please refer to the relevant operating guide tremely variable. It is possible that a device con-
for operation of the external audio source. nected as an external audio source will sound
왘 Select Audio £Audio£Aux in the Au- quieter or louder in the vehicle or that the usual
dio menu (컄 page 132). maximum volume cannot be achieved. On cer-
i If Audio Aux mode was active last, you only tain devices the volume can be set separately. In
need to select Audio. this case, start at a moderate volume and in-
crease it slowly. In this way, you can determine
whether the system is capable of playback with-
out distortion, even at high volume.

173
174
 Video
DVD Video ................................... 176
Video Aux .................................... 185

175
Video
DVD Video
DVD Video Vehicle Equipment ! Do not attach stickers or labels of any kind
to discs. They may come loose and damage
Safety Instructions i This Operator’s manual describes all fea- COMAND. Labels may also cause the disc to
tures, standard or optional, potentially available bend, which may result in reading errors and
G Warning for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be
problems with disc recognition.

COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser equipped with all features described in this man- ! COMAND has been designed for discs meet-
ual. ing the requirements of standard EN 60908.
product. You must not open the casing.
Therefore, only discs with a maximum thickness
There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
Automatic Picture Switch-off of 1.3 mm can be used.
radiation if you open the casing, or if the
If a thicker disc is inserted, e.g. one which stores
casing is faulty or damaged. If the vehicle is travelling faster than ap-
data on both sides, (DVD on one side, audio data
COMAND does not contain any parts that proximately 3 MPH, the picture will switch on the other side), this cannot be ejected and
you are able to maintain yourself. For safety off automatically in DVD video mode. COMAND will be damaged.
reasons, all maintenance work must be car- The following message will then appear in Do not use 8 cm diameter discs, not even with an
ried out by qualified technicians. the display: adapter.
In order not to distract you from the traffic Only use round, 12 cm diameter discs.
situation, the picture is faded out while the
G Warning vehicle is in motion.. Notes on the Care of Discs
As soon as the speed falls below approxi- 앫 Only touch the discs at the edges.
Only carry out the following when the vehi-
cle is stationary: mately 3 MPH, the picture switches back 앫 Handle discs with care in order to pre-
on again. vent malfunctions during playback.
앫 Inserting a disc
앫 Ejecting a disc Notes on Storage Media 앫 Avoid scratching, leaving fingerprints
i When playing copied discs, problems may and dust on the discs.
There is a risk of accident by being distract-
ed from road and traffic conditions if you occur with the playback. 앫 Clean the discs occasionally with a
load a CD/DVD while the vehicle is in mo- A wide variety of disc-writing software and writ- commercially available cleaning cloth.
tion. ers are available. Due to this variety we cannot Always wipe in a straight line from the
guarantee that the system will be able to play inside outwards, never in a circular mo-
discs that you have written/copied yourself tion.

176
 Video
DVD Video
앫 The discs must only be labelled using play video DVDs with other region codes, provid-
pens specially designed for this pur- ed that they have been made to the PAL or NTSC
pose. TV standard.
앫 After use, replace the discs into the Functional Restrictions
sleeve.
It may be the case that some functions or
앫 Protect the discs from heat and direct actions may not be possible at certain
sunlight. times, or may not be possible in general,
depending on the DVD.
DVD Playback Conditions When you activate such functions or ac-
Some DVDs may not comply with the tions, this is indicated by the 7 symbol in
NTSC or PAL TV playback standards. the display.
Sound, picture and other playback prob-
lems may occur when you play such DVDs. Loading DVDs
As standard, COMAND can play video 왘 Proceed as described in the “Loading
DVDs which meet the following criteria: CDs and DVDs” section (컄 page 150).
앫 Region code 1 or region code 0 (no re- Ejecting DVDs
gion code) 왘 Proceed as described in the “Ejecting
i With a video DVD having another region CDs and DVDs” section (컄 page 152).
code, a corresponding message will be dis-
played.
앫 PAL or NTSC TV standard
Information on this can usually be found ei-
ther on the DVD itself or on the DVD
sleeve.
i The factory setting for COMAND is region
code 1. An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
can change this setting. This will enable you to

177
Video
DVD Video
Submenu Overview

DVD-Video g/T h Media Sound

DVD functions g Pause h Stop playback Medium selection Treble

Brightness T Resuming playback Bass

Contrast T Restarting playback Balance/Fader
Color Surround sound
16:9 Optimized
4:3
Widescreen

178
 Video
DVD Video
Switching to DVD Video Displaying/Hiding Control Menu Displaying/Hiding Menu System
왘 Load DVD video (컄 page 150). 왘 To display: Press % or $. 왘 To display: Press C.
COMAND loads the inserted medium 왘 To hide: Press % or $. 왘 To hide: Press $ and select Full
and starts playing it. or Screen.
or 왘 Wait apprx. eight seconds.
왘 Press the function button é.
i Pressing the function button switches di-
rectly to the disc mode selected last (CD audio,
DVD audio, MP3 CD or DVD video). COMAND
then accesses all discs in the DVD changer.
왘 If necessary select Media and in the me-
dia list select (컄 page 180) a DVD vid-
eo I.
Menu system displayed

Control menu displayed 1 DVD-Video menu

2 Pause function
1 Disc type 3 Stop function
2 Current track 4 Media selection
3 Current scene 5 Sound settings
4 Elapsed track time
5 Displays menu system

179
Video
DVD Video
Fast Forward/Reverse Stop Function
왘 Press ( or & until the desired 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
point is reached. play the menu system (컄 page 179).
or 왘 To interrupt playback: Select h.
왘 Press and hold G or H on the The g display changes to T.
control unit until the desired point is 왘 To resume playback: Select T.
reached.
Playback will then continue at the point
The control menu will appear. at which it was interrupted. The menu
Selecting DVD Media system is hidden.
Media list
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis- 왘 To stop playback: Press h again
1 Symbol for DVD video when playback is stopped.
play the menu system (컄 page 179). 2 DVD Video currently playing
왘 Select Media. or
왘 To select DVD video I: Press %
The media list appears. The dotRindi- or $. 왘 Select h twice in immediate succes-
cates the medium currently playing. sion during playback.
왘 Press C.
The option selector remains at T.
COMAND switches the medium.
왘 To restart playback: Select T.
i If you select a CD-/DVD-audio or MP3 me-
dium, the system switches to the corresponding Playback will start from the beginning.
audio mode (컄 page 156). The menu system is hidden.
Further information on the media list can be
found on (컄 page 158).

180
 Video
DVD Video
Pause Function Selecting a Film/Track Picture Settings
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis- i The function is only available if the DVD is di- Adjusting the Brightness, Contrast or
play the menu system (컄 page 179). vided into several films/tracks.
Color
왘 To activate playback pause: 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
play the menu system (컄 page 179). 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
Select g.
play the menu system (컄 page 179).
The g display changes to T. 왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions.
왘 Select DVD-Video £ Brightness or
왘 To resume playback: Select T. A menu appears. Contrast or Color.
Selecting a Scene/Chapter 왘 To change setting: Press % or
왘 To skip forwards or backwards:
$ until the desired setting is
Press ( or &. reached.
or 왘 To save setting: Press C.
왘 Press G or H on the control unit. Switching Picture Format
The control menu appears for approx. 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
eight seconds (컄 page 179). play the menu system (컄 page 179).
왘 Select DVD-Video.
DVD function menu The DVD-Video menu appears. F in
왘 Press ( or & until Title Selection front of the menu items 16:9 Optimized,
is selected. 4:3 or Widescreen indicates the format
currently selected.
왘 To open selection list: Press C.
왘 To switch the format: Press % or
왘 Select a film/track. $ until the desired format is select-
ed.
왘 To save setting: Press C.

181
Video
DVD Video
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
DVD Menu
play the control menu (컄 page 179).
i The DVD menu is the menu stored on the
DVD itself. Its structure differs from one DVD to 왘 Select Menu £DVD-Video £ DVD Func-
another and enables specific actions or settings tions
to be performed. 왘 Select a directional arrow to navigate
the DVD menu.
Opening the DVD Menu
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
play the menu system (컄 page 179).
왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions £ 왘 To confirm selection: Select Select.
Menu.
COMAND will perform the action or dis-
The DVD menu appears. plays a submenu represented by the
Selecting Menu Items from the DVD menu item selected in the DVD menu.
Menu If necessary select from further options
in the same way.
왘 Press %, $, ( or &. COMAND then switches back to the
DVD menu
왘 To select: Press C. DVD menu.
The selection menu appears. i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the
i Menu items that cannot be selected are menu item Play either has no function or no func-
grayed out. tion in certain parts of the DVD menu. This is in-
dicated by the 7 symbol on the display.
or

182
 Video
DVD Video
Stopping Film or Skipping to the 왘 In the selection menu select the menu Setting Language
Beginning/End of a Scene item Go Up.
i The function is not available for all DVDs. If
왘 Select any menu item from the DVD i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the it is available, you can set the DVD menu lan-
menu. menu item Go Up either has no function or no guage, the audio language or the audio format.
function in certain parts of the DVD menu. This is The number of settings is determined by the DVD
The selection menu appears. indicated by the 7 symbol on the display. content. The settings may also be possible in the
왘 To stop a film: Select the menu item DVD menu (컄 page 182).
Back to Movie
Stop. 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
왘 To skip to the end of the scene: Se- 왘 Press the L button repeatedly until play the menu system (컄 page 179).
lect the menu item r. the film is shown.
왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions.
왘 To skip to the beginning of the or
왘 Select Audio Language.
scene: Select the menu item p. 왘 Select the corresponding menu item
A selection menu will appear after a
i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the from the DVD menu.
short time. The dotRin front of an en-
menu items p and r either have no func- or try indicates the currently selected lan-
tion or no function in certain parts of the DVD
menu. This is indicated by the 7 symbol on the 왘 Select any menu item from the DVD guage.
display. menu. 왘 To change setting: Press % or
왘 In the selection menu select the menu $ until the desired setting is
Switching to the next DVD Menu up item Back (to movie). reached.
왘 Press the L button. i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the 왘 To save setting: Press C.
or menu item Back (to movie) either has no function 왘 To exit menu without changes:
or no function in certain parts of the DVD menu. Press ( or &.
왘 Select the corresponding menu item
from the DVD menu.
or
왘 Select any menu item from the DVD
menu.

183
Video
DVD Video
Subtitles and Camera Angle Interactive Content
i The functions are not available for all DVDs. DVDs may have interactive content (e.g. a
The number of subtitles or camera angles is de- video game).
termined by the DVD content. The settings may In a video game, for example, you can con-
also be possible in the DVD menu (컄 page 182). trol the play by selecting or triggering ac-
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis- tions. The type and number of actions is
play the menu system (컄 page 179). dependent on the DVD.
왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions. 왘 To select an action: Press % or
$, ( or &.
왘 Select Subtitles or Camera Angle.
왘 To trigger an action: Press C.
In both cases, a selection menu will ap- The way you can control the actions de-
pear. The dotRin front of an entry in- A menu appears, the first entry Select is pends on the DVD.
dicates the current setting. highlighted.
왘 To change setting: Press % or 왘 Press C.
$ until the desired setting is or
reached.
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
왘 To save setting: Press C. play the control menu (컄 page 179).
왘 To exit menu without changes: Press 왘 Select Menu £DVD-Video £ DVD Func-
( or &. tions.
왘 Select a directional arrow to select or
trigger an action.

184
 Video
Video Aux
Video Aux Within the Video Function The following settings can be made in Vid-
eo Aux mode:
An external video source (Video AUX) can 왘 Select Video£Video Aux.
be connected to COMAND via the audio/ 앫 Volume (컄 page 31)
The Video Aux menu appears.
video cinch connectors located inside the The medium in the external video 앫 Balance and fader (컄 page 32)
glovebox. source is played, provided it is connect- 앫 Treble and bass (컄 page 32)
ed and switched to playback.
앫 Surround sound (컄 page 34)

GWarning
Due to the different volumes of the external
video sources, system messages (e.g. navi-
gation announcements) may be much loud-
er. You may need to disable these system
messages or adjust the volume of these
messages manually (컄 page 31).

1 Video connector (V) i The volume of external video sources is ex-

2 Audio connector (L) i Please refer to the relevant operating guide tremely variable. It is possible that a device con-
3 Audio connector (R) for operation of the external video source. nected as an external video source will sound
quieter or louder in the vehicle or that the usual
Switching to Video Aux maximum volume cannot be achieved. On cer-
tain devices the volume can be set separately. In
From Another Main Function
this case, start at a moderate volume and in-
왘Select Video £Video £Video Aux. crease it slowly. In this way, you can determine
whether the system is capable of playback with-
i If Video Aux mode was active last, you only out distortion, even at high volume.
need to select Video.

185
186
Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information................... 188
Basic Functions .......................... 196
System Settings ......................... 198
CD/DVD Audio/MP3 .................. 199
DVD Video Operation ................. 204
Aux Operation............................. 209

187
Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
Vehicle Equipment G Warning G Warning
i This Operator’s manual describes all fea-
tures, standard or optional, potentially available The RSE CD/DVD player is a Class 1 laser When not in use, headsets or external video
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please product. There is a danger of invisible laser sources should be stored in a safe location
be aware that your vehicle might not be radiation when you open or damage the cov- (e.g. one of the vehicle’s storage compart-
equipped with all features described in this man- er. ments) so that they are not loose within the
ual. Do not remove the cover. The RSE CD/DVD passenger compartment during braking, ve-
player does not contain any parts which can hicle maneuvers or a traffic accident. Ob-
General Information be serviced by the user. For safety reasons, jects moving within the passenger
This chapter describes the RSE (Rear Seat have any necessary service work performed compartment could cause serious personal
by qualified personnel. injury to vehicle occupants.
Entertainment) system:
앫 Basic functions (컄 page 196)
앫 System settings (컄 page 198) G Warning G Warning
앫 CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3 opera- The driver should not wear a Rear Seat En- Due to a potential choking hazard, wired
tion (컄 page 199) tertainment headset while operating the ve- headset usage by children should only occur
hicle under any circumstances. The use of a with adult supervision.
앫 DVD Video operation (컄 page 204)
headset while driving the vehicle could dras-
앫 Aux operation (컄 page 209) tically impair the ability to react to audible
traffic conditions (e.g. emergency sirens
from police/fire/ambulance, another driv-
er’s horn, etc.).

188
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
Parts of the Rear Seat Entertainment
System
The Rear Seat Entertainment system con-
sists of:
앫 two display screens behind the head
rests of the front seats
앫 a remote control
앫 a CD/DVD drive
앫 Aux connectors on the drive and dis-
play screens for connecting external
devices
앫 two wireless headsets

189
Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
Display Screens

1 Connector for wired headset 3 Display

2 Aux connectors 4 Infra-red sensors

190
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
Remote Control 1 Switching the display screen on or off 왘 Point the remote control to the active
2 Switching on/off the key illumination screen and press the button On/Off 1
3 Selecting the display screen (left/right) on the remote control.
4 Selecting menu item or menu (arrows) The display screen is switched on or
5 Confirming selection (OK) off.
6 Muting the playback
7 Setting the Volume (wired headset) i Switching on with the remote control is only
8 Skipping tracks forward/backward possible if the ignition is on.
9 Selecting a title directly Muting the Audio Playback (Only Wired
a Leaving a menu Headset)
Selecting the Active Display Screen for 왘 Press the button 6 on the remote con-
the Remote Control trol.
With the remote control you can select Depending on the previous state the
which of the two display screens is respon- sound is switched on or off.
sive to the remote control.
Selecting a Menu Item and Confirming
왘 Selecting the left/right display the Selection
screen: Rotate the wheel 3 until L or
R appears in the small window. 왘 Selecting the menu item: Press the
arrow buttons 4 on the remote con-
Switching On/Off the Display Screen trol.
i If the ignition key is in position 0 or 1 왘 Confirming the selection: Press the
(컄 vehicle operating guide) or the key is not in- OK button 5.
serted, the display screens are switched off au-
tomatically after 30 minutes. Before switching
off a corresponding message appears.
You can switch on the screen(s) again but be
aware it will continue to discharge the vehicle
battery.

191
Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
CD/DVD Drive and Aux Connectors
The CD/DVD drive is located in central po-
sition behind the front seats.

1 CD/DVD slot
2 Aux, right (R) connector for audio signal
3 Aux, left (L) connector for audio signal
4 Aux, connector for video signal (V)
5 CD/DVD eject button
The Aux connectors shown here represent
the source Disk Drive Aux. The same con-
nectors are available at the display
screens. These represent the Aux source
Display Aux (컄 page 209).

192
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
Wireless Headset

1 Setting the volume 3 Battery compartment 5 State Indicator LED

2 Selecting the display screen 4 Switching headset on/off

193
Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
왘 Adapt the fit of the headset by pulling State Indicator LED Replacing the Batteries
the headset clamp as indicated by the The color of the LED indicates:
arrows in the figure above. You need batteries for the remote control
앫 if the headset is switch on or off and the wireless headset.
Switching ON/Off the Wireless headset 앫 the battery condition
왘 Press button 4. G Warning
Color State Keep batteries out of the reach of children.
Depending on the previous state the
headset is switched on or off. In order Green Headset is switched Immediately seek medical help if a child
to preserve battery charge, the headset on and the batteries swallows a battery. Batteries are not to be
is switched off if there is no IR signal re- are full. short-circuited, dismantled or thrown into
ception for appr. 3 minutes. fire.
Dark Headset is switched
Setting the Wireless Headset Volume off or the batteries
왘 Turn the Thumb wheel 1 to set the de-
are empty or not in- H Environmental Note
serted.
sired volume. Batteries contain materials that can harm
Red Headset is switched the environment if disposed of improperly.
i If you have connected a wired headset to a on and the batteries
display screen, you can set the volume with the Recycling of batteries is the preferred
button 1 of the remote control (컄 page 191). are almost empty. method of disposal. Many states require
sellers of batteries to accept old batteries
Selecting the Display Screen for the Connecting Additional Headsets for recycling.
Headset You can connect wired headsets to both of
왘 Rotate the wheel 3 until L or R ap- the display screens. The socket is suitable
pears in the small window. for headsets with 1/8“ stereo jacks and
32 Ohm impedance (컄 page 190).

194
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
General Information
Remote Control Batteries 왘 Remove the cover of the battery com- Batteries of the Wireless Headset
partment 1 on the back of the remote The battery compartment is located in the
control by pressing down the snap-fit left earpiece
hook 2.
왘 Take out the empty batteries 5.
왘 Insert the new batteries. Mind the po-
larity marks on the batteries.
Battery on the left:
The plus terminal (+) must face up-
wards.
Battery on the right:
The plus terminal (+) must face down-
wards.
왘 Put the cover with the engagement 1 Battery compartment cover
hooks 4 first onto the battery com-
The wireless headset contains two batter-
partment and let the snap-fit hook 2
ies of size AAA, 1.5 V.
snap in.
왘 Open the battery compartment by lift-
ing the cover 1. Hold the headset as
shown to prevent the batteries from
falling out.
왘 Take out the empty batteries.
왘 Insert the new batteries. Mind the po-
larity marks on the batteries.
Battery on the left:
The remote control contains two batteries The plus terminal (+) must face up-
of size AAA, 1.5 V. wards.

195
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Basic Functions
Battery on the right: Basic Functions Main Loudspeaker Operation
The plus terminal (+) must face down-
wards. The Rear Seat Entertainment system al- i This function is only available in connection
lows you to use the following operating with COMAND.
왘 Close the battery compartment. modes: The sound of a medium which is played in
The state indicator LED lights green 앫 CD Audio/DVD Audio and MP3 mode the RSE disc drive can also be heard over
when you switch on the headset and (컄 page 199) the vehicle loudspeakers. For this, on at
the batteries were inserted correctly. least one of the display screens the oper-
앫 DVD Video mode (컄 page 204)
ating mode Disc has to be active.
앫 Aux mode
왘 Switching to Audio menu: Select Au-
In Aux mode you can play external vid-
dio£Audio on COMAND.
eo sources that are connected either to
the display screens or to the CD/DVD 왘 Select Rear.
drive. In addition you can play the ac- The volume control of the headsets has no
tive audio or video source of COMAND impact on the volume of the loudspeakers.
(컄 page 209).
With the system settings menu you can set Setting Treble and Bass
display design and language for each 왘 Switch to the menu of the respective
screen separately. operating mode
앫 CD Audio
Headset Operation
앫 DVD Audio
You can use the provided wireless headset
and/or two wired headsets connected to 앫 MP3
the display screens (컄 page 190). 앫 DVD Video
왘 Switch on the wireless headset. 앫 Aux
왘 Set the volume of the headset 왘 Select Treble or Bass.
왘 Select the display screen for the head- A setting scale appears.
set.

196
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
Basic Functions
왘 Changing the value: Press $ or 앫 Setting language, subtitle and camera Functional Restrictions in DVD Video
% button on the remote control. angle
Mode
왘 Confirming the setting: Press C on the 앫 Calling up interactive DVD content Some functions may temporarily or per-
remote control. The following functions affect only one dis- mantly not be available. If you use such
Multiuser Operation play screen: functions, you will see the symbol 7.
The two display screens can be operated 앫 Changing Audio, Video or screen set-
almost entirely independent from each tings
other. For some menus, however, there 앫 Switching between full screen and
can arise conflicts if the two display menu system.
screens are used simultaneously.
Switching Operation Modes
Simultaneous Use of the Disc Drive
When you leave an operation mode, e.g.
If on both display screens the disc drive is CD audio, its current settings are stored. If
used, the selection of certain settings on you call up this operation mode later, there
one screen will have an impact on the oth- are two possibilities:
er screen as well.
앫 The operation mode settings have been
The following functions affect both display changed on the other display screen.
screens:
앫 The operation mode settings have not
앫 Changing the playback options been changed.
앫 Selecting a track (from track list or In the first case the operation mode set-
folder) tings will be as they are on the other dis-
앫 Using the Play, Stop or Pause function. play screen.
앫 Using the fast forward/rewind function In the second case the settings remain as
they were before you left the operation
앫 Switching to DVD menu and and navi- mode.
gating through it.

197
Rear Seat Entertainment System
System Settings
System Settings The RSE system activates the selected The picture becomes brighter or darker
language. according the position of the red bar on
All system settings can be set for each dis- the scale.
play screen independently. Switching the Display Design
왘 Confirming the adjustment:
Calling up the System Menu 왘 Select System Settings. Press C on the remote control.
왘 Select System in the main function line. 왘 Select Day Mode, Night Mode or Automatic.
Switching the Display Screen On/
The system menu appears on the se- The symbol ä marks the current set-
Off
lected display screen. ting.
Day Mode Switching Off the Display
The system is permanently set to Day 왘 Select Display Off from the system
Mode. menu.
Night Mode
The system is permanently set to Night Switching On the Display
Mode. 왘 Press C on the remote control.
Automatic
The display mode changes in accor-
dance with the vehicle instrument illu-
mination.
왘 To confirm the selected mode:
Selecting the Display Language
Press C on the remote control.
왘 Select System Settings£Language.
A list of available languages appears. A Adjusting the Brightness
dotRmarks the current setting. 왘 Select System Settings£Brightness.
왘 Changing the setting: Select another A scale appears.
language with the button $ or % 왘 Adjusting the brightness:
on the remote control. Press $ or % on the remote con-
왘 Press C on the remote control. trol.

198
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation
CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation Loading a CD/DVD
Safety Instructions The CD/DVD drive is located in central po-
sition behind the front seats.
G Warning
COMAND is classified as a Class 1 laser
product. You must not open the casing.
There is a risk of exposure to invisible laser
laser radiation if you open the casing, or if
the casing is faulty or damaged.
COMAND does not contain any parts that The drive plays the disc
you are able to maintain yourself. For safety
앫 if it has been inserted properly and
reasons, all maintenance work must be car- 1 CD/DVD slot
ried out by qualified technicians. 2 Eject button 앫 after you have switched to disc opera-
tion..
The drive takes one medium at a time. If
Notes on CD/DVD Discs there is already a medium loaded, you The data of a MP3 disc must be first loaded
Please refer to the chapter ”Audio” for gen- must first eject it. from the drive. This takes some time de-
eral information about CD/DVD discs and pending on the number of folders and ti-
왘 Insert a disc into the slot with the print-
on the MP3 format (컄 page 148) and tles.
ed side upwards.
(컄 page 149). Ejecting a CD/DVD
If the medium has no printed side, the
side you want to play has to face down- 왘 Press the Eject button.
wards.
The drive ejects the medium.
The drive pulls the disc in.

199
Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation
Switching to CD Audio DVD Audio or Example Display of CD Audio Operation Example Display of DVD Audio Opera-
MP3 Operation tion
왘 Load the medium (컄 page 199).
왘 Select Disc with the é button on the
remote control.
The RSE system plays the medium.

1 Disc type J
2 Track number 1 Disc type K
3 Track name (only if stored on disc as 2 Track number
CD text) 3 Elapsed track time
4 Elapsed track time 4 Visual time and track display
5 Visual track and time display 5 Current playback option
6 Current playback option 6 Bass setting
7 Bass setting 7 Treble setting
8 Treble setting 8 Calls up track list
9 Disc name (only if stored on disc as CD 9 Stop function
text) a Pause function
a Calls up track list b Playback options setting
b Playback options setting

200
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation
Example Display of MP3 Operation Selecting Tracks The track list appears. The dotRindi-
cates the current track.
Selecting by Track 왘 To select a track: Press % or $
왘 To skip forwards or backwards to a on the remote control.
track: Press ( or & on the re- 왘 Press C on the remote control.
mote control. i In MP3 mode the list displays all tracks in al-
or phabetical order.
왘 Press G or H on the remote Fast Forward/Reverse
control.
왘 Press and hold ( or & on the re-
‘Forward track skip’ skips to the next mote control until the desired point is
track. reached when the main area is high-
1 Disc type L
‘Backward track skip’ skips to the begin- lighted.
2 Track number
3 Track name ning of the current track, if the track has or
4 Elapsed track time been playing for more than 8 seconds. If
the track has been playing for less than 8 왘 Press and hold G or H on the re-
5 Visual time and track display mote control until the desired point is
6 Current playback option seconds, it will skip to the beginning of the
previous track. reached.
7 Bass setting
8 Treble setting Selecting via Track List Selecting Folders
9 Current folder or medium name i The function is only available in MP3 mode.
a Calls up folder list 왘 In CD audio/DVD audio mode:
b Playback options setting Select Track List. 왘 Select Folder in MP3 mode.
i For MP3 titles with variable bitrate the dis- or or
play of the elapsed track time may not be cor- 왘 Press C on the remote control when
왘 In MP3 mode:
rect. the main area is highlighted.
Press C on the remote control when
the main area is highlighted. The folder list appears.

201
Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation
Pause Function
i This function is only available in DVD mode.
왘 To pause playback: Select «.
The symbol « changes to X.
왘 To continue playback: Select X.
The symbol X changes to «.
Stop Function
i This function is only available in DVD mode.
1 Back folder symbol 1 Back folder symbol
왘 To stop playback: Select ±.
2 Current folder name 2 Folder symbol
3 Track symbol The playback stops and jumps to the
왘 To select a folder: Press % or $
beginning of the DVD.
왘 To switch to the next folder up: Se- on the remote control.
lect theQsymbol. 왘 To restart playback: Select X.
왘 Press C on the remote control.
The display changes to the next folder The playback continues from the posi-
The tracks of the folder appear.
up. tion where it was stopped.
왘 To select a track: Press % or $
on the remote control.
왘 Press C on the remote control.
The track is played, the corresponding
folder is now the active folder.

202
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation
Setting Audio Format Playback Options i The option Normal Track Sequence is automat-
ically activated if you change the medium which
It is only possible to set the audio format in The following options are available: is currently being played or if you select another
DVD audio mode. The number of available 앫 Normal Track Sequence medium. An activated option remains active af-
audio formats is dependent on the DVD. You will hear the tracks in the normal ter COMAND is switched on or off.
The content of an audio DVD is called the sequence (e.g. track 1, 2, 3 etc.).
‘album’, which can be divided into a maxi-
mum of nine groups. A group may contain, 앫 Random Tracks
for example, music of different sound qual- You will hear the tracks in random or-
ities (stereo and multi-channel formats) or der (e.g. track 3, 8, 5 etc.).
bonus tracks. Each group can include up to 앫 Folder (only in MP3 mode)
99 tracks. If a DVD audio only comprises The tracks in the currently active folder
one audio format, the “Group” menu and any subfolders are heard in ran-
item(s) cannot be selected. dom order.
왘 Select DVD-A£Group. 왘 To select an option: Switch to CD au-
The list of available audio formats ap- dio, DVD audio or MP3 mode
pears. A dotRindicates the format (컄 page 200).
currently selected. 왘 Select CD or DVD-A or MP3.
왘 To change setting: Press % or The Options list appears. A dotRindi-
$ on the remote control. cates the activated option.
왘 Press C on the remote control. 왘 Select an option.
왘 To exit menu: Press ( or & on The option is activated. A correspond-
the remote control. ing display will appear in the main area
for all options except Normal Track Se-
quence.

203
Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Video Operation
왘 For this select the respective menu
DVD Video Operation Functional Restrictions
item (컄 page 207).
Please refer to the chapter ”Audio” for gen- It may be the case that some functions or
eral information about CD/DVD discs and actions may not be possible at certain i If Disc operation was selected last, the disc
on the MP3 format (컄 page 148) and times, or may not be possible in general, is played automatically after loading.
(컄 page 149). depending on the DVD.
For Safety Instructions refer to section When you activate such functions or ac-
“CD/DVD Audio and MP3 Operation” tions, this is indicated by the 7 symbol in
(컄 page 199). the display.
For special notes on DVDs and DVD play- Loading DVDs
back conditions refer to chapter “Video” 왘 Proceed as described in the “Loading a
(컄 page 176). CD/DVD” section (컄 page 199).
Ejecting DVDs
왘 Proceed as described in the “Ejecting a
CD/DVD” section (컄 page 199).
Switching to DVD Operation
왘 Load a DVD Video disc.
왘 Press é on the remote control.
DVD video operation is switched on.
The DVD is played according to the
playback options:
Either the film is started automatically
or the DVD menu appears that is stored
on the disc. In the latter case you must
start the film manually.

204
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Video Operation
Displaying/Hiding Control Menu Displaying/Hiding Menu System Fast Forward/Reverse
왘 To display: Press % or $ on the 왘 To display: Press C on the remote 왘 Press and hold G or H on the re-
remote control. control. mote control until the desired point is
왘 To hide: Press % or $ on the re- or reached.
mote control. 왘 Select Menu in the control menu The control menu will appear.
or Stop Function
왘 Wait apprx. eight seconds. 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
play the menu system (컄 page 205).
왘 To interrupt playback: Select h.
The playback stops.
왘 To resume playback: Select T.
Pause Function
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
Menu system displayed play the menu system (컄 page 205).
1 DVD-Video menu 왘 To activate playback pause:
Control menu displayed 2 Pause function Select g.
1 Disc type 3 Stop function The g display changes to T.
2 Current track 4 Treble setting
왘 To resume playback: Select T.
3 Current scene 5 Bass setting
The menu system will be hidden.
4 Elapsed track time
왘 To hide: Press $ on the remote
5 Displays menu system
control and select Full Screen.

205
Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Video Operation
Selecting a Scene/Chapter Selecting a Film/Track Picture Settings
If the film is subdivided into scenes or i The function is only available if the DVD is di- Adjusting the Brightness, Contrast or
chapters, you can select the scenes or vided into several films/tracks.
Color
chapters step by step while the film is run- 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
ning. Some DVDs do not allow this in cer- play the menu system (컄 page 205). 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
tain sections (e.g. in the introduction). play the menu system (컄 page 205).
왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions.
왘 To skip forwards or backwards: 왘 Select DVD-Video £ Brightness or
Press ( or & on the remote con- A menu appears. Contrast or Color.
trol. 왘 To change setting: Press % or
or $ on the remote control until the
왘 Press G or H on the remote con- desired setting is reached.
trol. 왘 To save setting: Press C on the re-
The control menu appears for approx. mote control.
eight seconds (컄 page 205). Switching Picture Format
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
play the menu system (컄 page 205).
DVD function menu 왘 Select DVD-Video.
왘 Press ( or & on the remote con- The DVD-Video menu appears. F in
trol until Title Selection is selected. front of the menu items 16:9 Optimized,
4:3 or Widescreen indicates the format
왘 To open selection list: Press C on currently selected.
the remote control.
왘 To switch the format: Press % or
왘 Select a film/track. $ on the remote control until the
desired format is selected.

206
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Video Operation
왘 To save setting: Press C on the re- Stopping Film or Skipping to the
mote control. Beginning/End of a Scene
DVD Menu 왘 Select any menu item from the DVD
i The DVD menu is the menu stored on the menu.
DVD itself. Its structure differs from one DVD to The selection menu appears.
another and enables specific actions or settings
왘 To stop a film: Select the menu item
to be performed.
Stop.
Opening the DVD Menu 왘 To skip to the end of the scene: Se-
lect the menu item r.
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis- 왘 To confirm selection: Select Select.
play the menu system (컄 page 205). 왘 To skip to the beginning of the
COMAND will perform the action or dis- scene: Select the menu item p.
왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions £ plays a submenu represented by the
Menu. i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the
menu item selected in the DVD menu. menu items p and r either have no func-
The DVD menu appears. If necessary select from further options tion or no function in certain parts of the DVD
in the same way. menu. This is indicated by the 7 symbol on the
Selecting Menu Items from the DVD
COMAND then switches back to the display.
Menu
DVD menu.
왘 Press %, $, ( or & on the i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the
remote control. menu item Play either has no function or no func-
왘 To select: Press C on the remote con- tion in certain parts of the DVD menu. This is in-
trol. dicated by the 7 symbol on the display.
The selection menu appears.
i Menu items that cannot be selected are
grayed out.

207
Rear Seat Entertainment System
DVD Video Operation
Switching to the next DVD Menu up Setting Language Subtitles and Camera Angle
왘 Select the corresponding menu item i The function is not available for all DVDs. If i The functions are not available for all DVDs.
from the DVD menu. it is available, you can set the DVD menu lan- The number of subtitles or camera angles is de-
guage, the audio language or the audio format. termined by the DVD content. The settings may
or The number of settings is determined by the DVD also be possible in the DVD menu (컄 page 207).
왘 Select any menu item from the DVD content. The settings may also be possible in the
왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
menu. DVD menu (컄 page 207).
play the menu system (컄 page 205).
왘 In the selection menu select the menu 왘 In DVD video mode, if necessary dis-
왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions.
item Go Up. play the menu system (컄 page 205).
왘 Select Subtitles or Camera Angle.
i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the 왘 Select DVD-Video £ DVD Functions.
menu item Go Up either has no function or no In both cases, a selection menu will ap-
왘 Select Audio Language.
function in certain parts of the DVD menu. This is pear. The dotRin front of an entry in-
indicated by the 7 symbol on the display. A selection menu will appear after a dicates the current setting.
short time. The dotRin front of an en-
왘 To change setting: Press % or
Back to Movie try indicates the currently selected lan-
$ on the remote control until the
guage.
왘 Select the corresponding menu item desired setting is reached.
from the DVD menu. 왘 To change setting: Press % or
왘 To save setting: Press C on the re-
$ on the remote control until the
or mote control.
desired setting is reached.
왘 Select any menu item from the DVD 왘 To exit menu without changes: Press
왘 To save setting: Press C on the re-
menu. ( or & on the remote control.
mote control.
왘 In the selection menu select the menu
왘 To exit menu without changes:
item Back (to movie).
Press ( or & on the remote con-
i Depending on the DVD, it is possible the trol.
menu item Back (to movie) either has no function
or no function in certain parts of the DVD menu.

208
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
Aux Operation
Interactive Content Aux Operation Switching to Aux Mode
DVDs may have interactive content (e.g. a i You can connect two external video sources Drive Aux
video game). to the display screens (Display Aux) and addi-
In a video game, for example, you can con- tionally one video source to the DVD drive (Drive 왘 Select Aux.
trol the play by selecting or triggering ac- Aux).
The Aux menu appears.
tions. The type and number of actions is For further information on external video sourc-
dependent on the DVD. es please refer to the operating guide of the de-
왘 To select an action: Press % or vice.
$, ( or & on the remote con- Connecting an Aux Source
trol.
왘 To trigger an action: Press C on the Drive Aux
remote control. The Aux connectors of the drive are beside
A menu appears, the first entry Select is the Eject button on the front panel of the
highlighted. DVD drive (컄 page 192).
왘 Press C on the remote control. Display Aux
Aux Menu
The Aux connectors of the display are on 왘 Select Source£Drive Aux.
the right hand side of the display screen
(컄 page 190). The video source is played if it is con-
nected to the drive and in playback
Connecting an Audio or Video Source mode. If there is no video picture avail-
able, an Audio menu appears.
왘 Insert the audio jacks for the left and
the right signal into the respective con-
i For operating the external video source
please refer to the operator’s guide of the de-
nectors labeled L and R. vice.
왘 Insert the video jack (yellow) into the
connector with the V label.

209
Rear Seat Entertainment System
Aux Operation
Display Aux 왘 Switching of the function on COMAND:
Operation with Active Source from
Switch to the desired Audio mode or
왘 Select the display screen to which the COMAND
display the menu system in Video
external source is connected. Audio or Video that is active in COMAND mode on COMAND.
왘 Select Aux. can also be played back via the RSE sys-
왘 Select the menu item on the left below,
tem.
왘 Select Source£Display Aux. e.g. CD if COMAND is in CD mode.
왘 Switch to the desired Audio mode or
The video source is played if it is con- display the menu system in Video
nected to the screen and in playback mode on COMAND.
mode. If there is no video picture avail-
able, an Audio menu appears. 왘 Select the menu item on the left below,
e.g. CD if COMAND is in CD mode.
Selecting an Active COMAND Source 왘 Select Active Source for the Rear.
왘 Select Aux.
왘 Select Source£COMAND Audio or
COMAND Video.
COMAND Audio: The Audio mode to
왘 Select Rear Off.
which COMAND is set is played by the
RSE system, too.
COMAND Video: COMAND sends the
video picture to the RSE system.

In the status line you will see the headset

symbol and the symbol _ indicating the
active mode.
If you change the mode in COMAND, the
new mode is also played back via the RSE
system. The display changes accordingly.

210
 Rear Seat Entertainment System
Aux Operation
Setting Brightness/Contrast/Color
왘 Select in the Aux menu Display Aux or
Drive Aux.
왘 Select Brightness, Contrast or Color.
A scale appears.
왘 Setting the value: Press % or $
on the remote control.
왘 Confirming the setting:
Press C on the remote control.
Changing the Picture Format
왘 Select in the Aux menu Display Aux or
Drive Aux.
The symbol F in front of the menu
items 16:9 Optimized, 4:3 or Widescreen in-
dicates the format currently selected.
왘 To switch the format: Press % or
$ on the remote control until the
desired format is selected.
왘 To save setting: Press C on the re-
mote control.

211
212
 Voice Control
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214
Phone Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
Navigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
Radio and Satellite Radio . . . . . .234
DVD Changer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
External Equipment (AUX) . . . . .239
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

213
Voice Control
Overview
Overview Traffic regulations always have priority over Vehicle Equipment
any route recommendations given. i This Operator’s manual describes all fea-
Operating Safety
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph tures, standard or optional, potentially available
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
G Warning covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate-
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please
be aware that your vehicle might not be
Please devote your attention first and fore- ly 13.5 m) every second. equipped with all features described in this man-
most to the traffic situation you are in. While ual.
the system permits hands-free phone oper-
ation, attention to traffic may be diverted
G Warning Symbols only used in this chapter
not only by physical operation of a phone, Navigation announcements are intended to The following symbols indicate:
but also by the distraction of a phone con- direct you while driving without diverting s that you have to say something
versation while driving. As such, for safety your attention from the road and driving.
reasons, we encourage the driver to stop the t that there is a voice output from the
Please always use this feature instead of
vehicle in a safe place before answering or consulting the map display for directions. voice control
placing a phone call. Consulting the symbols or map display for u that the system shows information
For safety reasons, you should only select a directions may cause you to divert your at- on the display.
destination when the vehicle is stationary. tention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident. Usage
While the navigation system provides direc-
tional assistance, the driver must remain fo- You can use the voice control system to
operate the following systems depending
cused on safe driving behavior, especially
attention to traffic and street signs, and
G Warning on the equipment in your vehicle:
should utilize the system’s audio cues while Please do not use the Voice Control System 앫 Phone
driving. in an emergency, as the tone of your voice
may change in a stressful situation. This 앫 Navigation
The navigation system does not supply any
could cause a delay in completing your 앫 Address book
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic phone call in a timely manner. This could
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob- distract you in an emergency situation and 앫 Audio (radio, satellite radio,
servance always remains in the driver’s per- cause you to be involved in an accident. DVD changer, memory card,
sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover music register)
all areas nor all routes within an area.

214
 Voice Control
Overview
Say the commands without pausing For example, if you are listening to the ra- i You can cancel the dialog with voice control
between individual words. If you enter a dio while the navigation application is ac- at any time.
command that does not exist or is incor- tive on the display, you can operate both Voice control is operational around half a
rect, the voice control system asks you for applications using voice control. minute after COMAND is switched on.
a new command with “Please repeat” or To operate a different function using voice
“Please repeat your entry!”. control, you must first switch to that appli- Vehicles with Lever for Voice Control
The voice control confirms important com- cation using the corresponding command.
mands to you and gives you instructions in
the event of incorrect entries. Operating Voice Control

Command Types Vehicles with Voice Control buttons on

the Multi-function Steering Wheel
Voice control distinguishes between the
following types of command:
앫 Global commands:
These are commands which can be
called up at any time (e.g. help or
phone commands). Example display: SL-Class

앫 Local commands: 1 º Cancels voice control

These are commands which are only 2 ¸ Activates voice control
available for the active application (e.g.
“Enter destination” during navigation). 3 ç Decreases the volume
Example display: M-Class
æ Increases the volume
Active Application
1 ! Activates voice control
The local commands refer to the applica-
2 L Cancels voice control
tion currently shown on the display and to
the audio source you are currently listen- 3 ç Decreases the volume
ing to. æ Increases the volume

215
Voice Control
Overview
Starting the Dialog Canceling the Dialog Display Messages
왘 Switch on the ignition (see the vehicle 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons The audible help function can be supple-
Owner's Manual). on the Multi-function Steering mented by visual help on the display
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons Wheel: Press the L button on the (컄 page 39). If the help function is
on the Multi-function Steering multifunction steering wheel. switched on, the most important com-
Wheel: Press the ! button. or mands that are currently possible appear
in the display when you start the dialog.
or 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
trol: Push the Voice Control lever away In the address book and navigation sys-
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- tem, a selection list is shown in the display
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- from you º.
if voice control requires additional informa-
ward you ¸. or tion from you.
An acoustic signal confirms that the di- Say the command “Cancel” (except when
alog has been started. creating and storing voice tags, navigation
왘 Give a command. entries or during individualization).
or
Interrupting the Dialog
왘 Press any button on COMAND.
If a list appears on the display, you can use
the “Pause” command to interrupt the dia- Adjusting the Volume
log. You can then select an entry using the 왘 Start the dialog.
COMAND controller.
왘 Give a command, e.g. “Help”.
To resume the dialog with voice control,
press the ! button on the multifunction 왘 Press the æ or ç button.
Example display: SL-Class
steering wheel. The volume increases or decreases
during voice output. 1 Display
or
왘 Set the volume for the voice output on
the volume control for COMAND.

216
 Voice Control
Overview
Entering Numbers
앫 Digits from “zero” to “nine” are permit-
ted.
앫 Say the phone number in groups of
three to five digits.
Spell
앫 The letters of the alphabet and the
numbers 0 - 9 are permitted.
앫 Say the letters in groups of five to sev-
en letters.
앫 Say each individual letter clearly.
i Using individualization, you can fine-tune
voice control to your own voice and thus improve
voice recognition. The process of individualiza-
tion is described in chapter “System Settings”
(컄 page 39).
i If you use individualization, it may impair
recognition of other users. Switch off individual-
ization if it makes recognition of other users
worse.

217
Voice Control
Phone Operation
Phone Operation G Warning Operation
You can use voice control to:
G Warning Never operate radio transmitters equipped
앫 place a call by using your voice to input
with a built-in or attached antenna (i.e. with-
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from out being connected to an external antenna) a phone number
using a cellular telephone while driving. from inside the vehicle while the engine is 앫 store names and numbers in the ad-
Whether or not prohibited by law, for safety running. Doing so could lead to a malfunc-
reasons, the driver should not use the cellu-
dress book
tion of the vehicle’s electronic system, pos-
lar telephone while the vehicle is in motion. sibly resulting in an accident and/or 앫 dial a number from the address book
Stop the vehicle in a safe location before personal injury. 앫 listen to the phone book
placing or answering a call.
앫 retrieve and manage your voice mail
If you nonetheless choose to use the mobile
and recorded announcement services
phone while driving, please use the hands-
free feature and be sure to pay attention to 앫 redial
the traffic situation at all times. Use the mo- Voice control recognizes whether:
bile phone only when road, weather and traf-
fic conditions permit. Otherwise, you may 앫 your phone is switched on
not be able to observe traffic conditions and 앫 your phone is connected via Bluetooth
could endanger yourself and others.
앫 the car phone is registered with the rel-
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph evant mobile phone network
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- 앫 it is possible to dial
ly 14 m) every second. If it is not possible to dial, voice control is-
sues a message to this effect.
i You can still operate your phone using the
keypad.

218
 Voice Control
Phone Operation
Commands Example of dialog: “Confirm”
s Dial number While you are entering a number, you can
“Phone”
t Please say the number use the “Confirm” command to have all the
Use the “Phone” command to select the s Zero one three zero spoken digits repeated by voice control.
phone application. Use this command if Voice control will then prompt you to con-
you wish the digits entered to be shown on t Zero one three zero tinue with the entry.
the display. s Five zero zero five Example of dialog:
“Help Phone” t Five zero zero five s Dial number
s Okay t Please say the number
Voice control has an extensive help func-
tion. Using the “Help Phone” command, t Dialing number. s Zero one three zero
you can have all the essential commands i You can also dial the specified number if you t Zero one three zero
for the phone read out (컄 page 241). press the s button on the multi-function
steering wheel instead of the concluding com- s Confirm
“Dial Number” mand “Okay”. t Zero one three zero. Please contin-
You can use the “Dial number” command ue
to dial a phone number. s Five zero zero five
The digits 0 - 9 and the word “Plus” are per- t Five zero zero five
mitted.
s Okay
Say the phone number in the form of a con-
t Dialing number.
tinuous string of digits or as blocks of dig-
its, e.g. three to five digits.
Voice control repeats the digits it recogniz-
es after each block of digits (with a pause
of about half a second between each block
of digits) and waits for you to continue
speaking.

219
Voice Control
Phone Operation
“Correction” “Delete” “Save Name” (address book)
While you are entering a number, you can While you are entering a number, you can (컄 page 231)
use the “Correction” command to correct use the “Delete” command to delete all the
the block of digits last spoken. When you digits which have been entered. After you “Dial Name” (address book)
input this command, voice control deletes have input this command, voice control (컄 page 232)
the last block of digits and repeats the dig- prompts you to enter additional digits or
its input up to this point. Voice control will commands. “Delete Name” (address book)
then prompt you to continue with the en- Example of dialog:
try. (컄 page 232)
s Dial number
Example of dialog: “Find Name” (address book)
t Please say the number
s Dial number (컄 page 232)
s Zero one three zero
t Please say the number
t Zero one three zero “List Phone Book” and Dialing a Phone
s Zero one three zero Number
s Five zero zero five
t Zero one three zero
t Five zero zero five You can use the “List phone book” com-
s Five zero zero five mand to listen to all entries in the phone
s Delete
t Five zero nine five book in which a phone number is also
t Number deleted, please say the stored and, if required, select an entry.
s Correction number again:
Example of dialog:
t Zero one three zero. Please contin- s Zero three seven three
ue s List phone book
t Zero three seven three
s Five zero zero five The system reads out all the ad-
s Three nine one dress book entries with phone num-
t Five zero zero five
t Three nine one bers.
s Okay
s Okay
t Dialing number.
t Dialing number.

220
 Voice Control
Phone Operation
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons “Redial”
on the Multi-function Steering
Wheel: You can use the “Redial” command to redi-
Press the ! button to select a name al the number most recently called.
and number. Managing Announcement Services or
or Voice Mail
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- You can also use voice control to manage
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- your voice mail or recorded announcement
ward you ¸. services.ontrols
If there is more than one phone number While a phone call is in progress:
for an entry, voice control queries this. 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
t Do you want to make a work call or on the Multi-function Steering
a home call? Wheel: Press the ! button
s Home call or
To cancel the dialog: 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
on the Multi-function Steering ward you ¸.
Wheel: Press the L button. An acoustic signal confirms that the
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- system is activated.
trol: Push the Voice Control lever away 왘 Say the required digits (“zero” to
from you º “nine”).
You have cancelled the dialog. The sys- or
tem confirms by responding “Cancel”. 왘 Say the required words “Star” or
“Hash”.
왘 Say the concluding command “Okay”.
The system dials the number entered.

221
Voice Control
Navigation
Navigation G Warning G Warning
G Warning During route guidance, you will not receive Please do not use the Voice Control System
information on: in an emergency, as the tone of your voice
For safety reasons, you should only select a may change in a stressful situation. This
앫 traffic lights
destination when the vehicle is stationary. could cause a delay in completing your
While the navigation system provides direc- 앫 stop and yield signs
phone call in a timely manner. This could
tional assistance, the driver must remain fo- 앫 parking or stopping zones distract you in an emergency situation and
cused on safe driving behavior, especially cause you to be involved in an accident.
앫 one-way streets
attention to traffic and street signs, and
should utilize the system’s audio cues while 앫 narrow bridges, or
driving. 앫 other traffic regulation data.
The navigation system does not supply any You should therefore always strictly observe
information on stop signs, yield signs, traffic traffic regulations while driving. Drive care-
regulations or traffic safety rules. Their ob- fully and always obey traffic laws and road
servance always remains in the driver’ per- signs, even if they contradict navigation sys-
sonal responsibility. DVD maps do not cover tem instructions.
all areas nor all routes within an area.
Traffic regulations always have priority over
any route recommendations given. G Warning
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph Navigation announcements are intended to
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is direct you while driving without diverting
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximate- your attention from the road and driving.
ly 13.5 m) every second. Please always use this feature instead of
consulting the map display for directions.
Consulting the symbols or map display for
directions may cause you to divert your at-
tention from driving and increase your risk
of an accident.

222
 Voice Control
Navigation
Operation To select the navigation application: Commands
You can use voice control to: 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons You cannot start the route guidance until
on the Multi-function Steering all the necessary address data has been
앫 enter a state Wheel: entered.
앫 enter a province Press the ! button on the multi-
앫 enter a city function steering wheel “Help Navigation”/“Help”
앫 enter a district (center) or Using the “Help navigation” command, you
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- can have all the essential commands for
앫 enter a street
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- the navigation system read out.
앫 enter a house number ward you ¸.
앫 enter an entire address 왘 Give the “Navigation” command.
앫 enter a zip code 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
앫 find address on the Multi-function Steering
Wheel:
앫 enter a point of interest
Press the ! button on the multi-
앫 select one of your previous destina- function steering wheel
tions
or
앫 call up route information
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
앫 store a destination trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
앫 display the map ward you ¸.
앫 enlarge/reduce the size of the map 왘 Give one of the navigation commands
explained below.
앫 listen to the destination memory
앫 start and stop route guidance
앫 switch the guidance instructions on
and off

223
Voice Control
Navigation
Entering an Address “Enter Destination” s Yes
i If voice control fails to recognize your entry, You can use the “Enter destination” com- t Please say the name of the street
it is advisable to spell the name of the town and mand to enter a complete address. s Park Avenue
street. Spell names of towns and streets when
abroad.
The system guides you through the whole t Loading list of streets
dialog. As soon as a valid address is en- u The system shows a numbered list
The system guides you completely through tered (at least the town), you can use the
the dialog to route guidance. As soon as a of possible street names on the dis-
“Start route guidance” command to start play. If there is only one entry on
valid address is entered (at least the town), the route guidance.
you can use the “Start route guidance” the list, voice control asks if it is
Example of dialog: correct.
command to start the route guidance.
s Enter destination t Please select a line number.
“Enter State”/“Enter Province”
t Do you want to enter street first or s Line number 1 ...
You can use the “Enter state”/“Enter pro- town first?
t Line number 1 accepted.
vince” command to change the state or s Town
province setting of the navigation system. t Do you want to enter a house num-
t Please say the name of the town ber?
Example of dialog:
s Albany s No
s Enter state
t Loading list of towns t Would you like to start route guid-
t Please enter the name of the state. ance?
u The system shows a numbered list
u The system shows a numbered list of possible city names on the dis- s Yes
of possible state names on the dis- play. If there is only one entry on
play. If there is only one entry on t Starting route guidance
the list, voice control asks if it is
the list, voice control asks if it is correct. The system stores the selected destination
correct. and starts route guidance.
t Please select a line number.
t Please select a line number. If you give one of the following commands,
s Line number 1 ... the system guides you through the dialog
s Line number 1 ...
t Line number 1 accepted. to route guidance.
t Line number 1 accepted.
t Do you want to enter a street?

224
 Voice Control
Navigation
“Enter Town” “Spell Town” The town is stored for route guidance.
You can use the “Enter town” command to Using the “Spell town” command, you can i You can use the “Next page” or “Previous
enter any town in the state or province that spell any town. This may be necessary if page” commands to scroll through the list. You
can use the “Correction” command to spell the
is currently selected. certain town or street names are not rec-
town again from the beginning.
i If the city you require does not appear in the ognized.
list or the system fails to recognize the name of Say the letters in the form of a continuous
i Note that the list in the display is sorted ac-
cording to the probability of voice recognition.
the town, it can be entered by using the “Spell string of letters. In the case of long names,
town” command. it is not always necessary to spell the “Enter District” (Center)
i You can use the “Next page” or “Previous whole name. Usually only the first five to
page” commands to scroll through the list. You seven letters are required. A list of city You can use the “Enter district” command
can use the “Correction” command to enter the names will appear in the display and you to enter an area in a city which you have
name of the town again. can choose the one you require. selected previously.
Example of Dialog: Say each individual letter clearly. Example of dialog:
s Enter town It is not easy to avoid confusion of similar- s Enter district
t Please say the name of the town sounding letters (e.g. D and E). t Please say the name of the district.
s Albany Example of Dialog: s Manhattan
t Loading list of towns s Spell town u The system shows a numbered list
t Please spell the town of districts in the display if the se-
u The system shows a numbered list
lected city has more than one dis-
of possible town names on the dis- s F-R-E-N-S-
trict.
play t Loading list of towns
t Please select a line number.
t Please select a line number. u The system shows a numbered list
s Line number 1 ...
s Line number 1 ... of city names on the display
t Line number 1 accepted.
t Line number 1 accepted. t Please select a line number.
The district is stored for route guidance.
The town is stored for route guidance. s Number three
t Number three accepted

225
Voice Control
Navigation
“Enter Street” “House Number” 3 Change state
You can use the “Enter Street” command You can use the “House number” com- 4 Change province
to enter the name of any street in the se- mand to specify the house number for the t Please select a line number.
lected city. selected street in individual digits. s Line number 1 ...
i If only a few streets are stored for a selected Example of dialog: t Line number 1 accepted.
town, they will be displayed for selection imme-
s House number u The system shows a numbered list
diately after you give the “Enter Street” com-
mand. t Please say the house number in sin- of POI categories
gle digits
Example of dialog: t Please select a line number or say
s Three four the category name
s Enter Street
t Three four s Line number 5 ...
t Please say the name of the street
s Okay t Number 5 accepted
s Mabel’s Street
The house number is stored for route guid- u The system shows a numbered list
u The system shows a numbered list
ance. with destinations from the selected
of street names on the display
category
t Please select a line number. “Point of Interest” (POI)
t Please select a line number.
s Number three You can use the “Point of interest” com-
s Line number 1 ...
t Number three accepted mand to select specific destinations (filling
stations, airports, stations, etc.). t Line number 1 accepted.
The street name is stored for route guid-
ance. Example of dialog: The specific destination which has the
number one is stored for route guidance.
s Point of interest
“Correction” i Depending on the selected area, other lists
u The system shows the following list may be shown.
If you have entered or spelled a city or in the display:
street, you can use the “Correction” com- You can only select points of interest in the
1 Current position state or province the navigation system is
mand to enter the city or street again or
spell it from the beginning. 2 Other town set for.

226
 Voice Control
Navigation
Selecting Next Point of Interest s Yes “Save Destination”
You can use the following commands to The dialog continues as shown in the sec- You can use the “Save destination” com-
select nearby points of interest. tion “Save Destination” mand to save the current destination in the
앫 “Next gas station” address book by means of a voice tag.
“Last Destinations”
앫 “Next car park” i If the desired voice tag already exists in the
You can use the “Last destinations” com- address book, the system asks if you want to add
앫 “Next Mercedes-Benz Service” mand to reselect a destination from a list the address.
앫 “Next restaurant” of the previously selected destinations.
Example of dialog:
앫 “Next hospital” Example of dialog:
s Save destination
Example of dialog: s Last destinations
t Please say the name.
s Next gas station u The system shows a numbered list
s Smith
of the previously selected destina-
u The system shows a numbered list t Please repeat the name.
tions
of gas stations on the display
t Please select a line number. s Smith
t Please select a line number.
s Line number 1 ... t Where would you like to save: home
s Line number 1 ... or work?
u Line number one accepted. Would
u Line number one accepted. Would s Work
you like to start route guidance?
you like to start route guidance?
s Yes t The destination has been saved.
s Yes
The route guidance for this destination is
The route guidance for this point of inter-
started.
est is started.
or
s No
t Do you want to save the destina-
tion?

227
Voice Control
Navigation
“Find Address” “Route Information” “Cancel Route Guidance”
You can use the “Find address” command You can use the “Route information” com- You can use this command to stop route
to select a previously saved address and mand to have the following information on guidance.
start route guidance. your currently planned route read out: Example of dialog:
Example of dialog: 앫 Distance to destination s Cancel route guidance
s Find address 앫 Remaining driving time t Are you sure you want to cancel
t Please say the name. 앫 Expected arrival time route guidance?
s Smith “Guidance Instructions On” s Yes
u The system shows a numbered list t Cancelling route guidance
of saved addresses in the display When you use the “Guidance instructions
on” command, voice control repeats the Voice control cancels route guidance.
t Please select a line number. last driving tip. If the driving tip output has or
s Line number 1 ... been switched off up to this point, it is now s No
t Line number 1 accepted. switched on again.
t Continuing route guidance.
t Starting route guidance “Guidance Instruction Off ” The dialog with voice control is terminated.
“Start Route Guidance” You can use this command to switch off Route guidance remains activated.
the route guidance voice output.
When Route Guidance is inactive, you can “Zoom In/Out"
use the “Start route guidance” command to You can use these commands to zoom the
start route guidance once a valid destina- map display one step in or out.
tion has been entered.
s Start route guidance “Zoom In/Out Completely”
t Starting route guidance You can use these commands to set the
map display directly to the smallest or larg-
est scale.

228
 Voice Control
Navigation
“List Destination Memory” To cancel the dialog:
You can use the “List destination memory” 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
command to listen to the entries from the on the Multi-function Steering
address book’s destination memory and, if Wheel: Press the L button.
required, navigate to one of them. 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
s List destination memory trol: Push the Voice Control lever away
from you º
The system reads out all entries,
from the address book destination You have cancelled the dialog. The sys-
memory. tem confirms by responding “Cancel”.
To select an entry and set an address:
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
on the Multi-function Steering
Wheel:
Press the ! button on the multi-
function steering wheel
or
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
ward you ¸
at the selected entry.
t If there is more than one address,
the system asks “Navigate to: home
or work?”
s Home
The system starts route guidance

229
Voice Control
Address Book
pends on the text that was entered. To
“

Address Book Operation

make a call you must say the text of the en-
You can use voice control at any time to:
G Warning try.
앫 save a name
Check the address book entries for the fol-
Please devote your attention first and fore-
lowing: 앫 select a name
most to the traffic situation you are in.
앫 The name entries, e.g. last name and 앫 delete a name
Before your journey, please familiarize your-
self with the address book functions.
first name, are in the right fields. 앫 list the address book
앫 Do not use abbreviations or acronyms. 앫 delete the address book
Only use the Voice Control System when
road and traffic conditions permit you to do 앫 Avoid unnecessary spaces in names. 앫 open the address book
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an
앫 Do not use special characters. 앫 open an entry from the address book
accident in which you or others could be in-
jured. You can improve voice recognition by sav- 앫 list the phone book
ing a speaker-dependent voice tag for ad-
dress book entries. 앫 list the destination memory
Overview To Open the Address Book:
Use a speaker-dependent voice tag:
The address book gives you the option of
앫 for names which are difficult to pro- 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
storing information about people in the
form of entries. nounce on the Multi-function Steering
Wheel:
Using voice control, you can dial a phone 앫 to distinguish names which sound sim- Press the ! button on the multi-
number stored in the address book or start ilar function steering wheel.
route guidance for a stored address. 앫 for names which are not pronounced as or
Apart from the speaker-dependent voice they are written
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
tags stored in the address book, voice con- Voice control can store up to 50 of these trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
trol can recognize all the entries in the address book entries by means of a speak-
name fields of the address book. Recogni- ward you ¸
er-dependent voice tag.
tion of the entries in the address book de- 왘 Give the “Address book” command.

230
 Voice Control
Address Book
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons Voice control repeats the digits it recogniz-
Commands
on the Multi-function Steering es after each block of digits (with a pause
Wheel: “Address Book” of about half a second between each block
Press the ! button on the multi- of digits) and waits for you to continue
왘 To open the address book: say the
function steering wheel. speaking.
command “Address book”.
or When you have given the command
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- “Help Address Book” “Okay”, voice control prompts you two or
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- three times to say the name. When repeat-
Using the “Help address book” command, ing the name, make sure that you pro-
ward you ¸ you can have all the essential commands nounce it in exactly the same way as you
왘 Give one of the address book com- for the address book read out. did the first time. Otherwise, the name
mands explained below. cannot be saved and voice control aborts
“Save Name”
the saving procedure.
Use the “Save name” command to save a Example of dialog:
phone number with a voice tag for a specif-
ic speaker. Use this command for a name s Save name
which is complicated or which is pro- t Please say the number
nounced differently than it is spelled, for s Zero one three zero
example, because it is a foreign name.
When you have given the command “Save t Zero one three zero
name”, voice control prompts you to enter s Five zero zero five
a phone number.
t Five zero zero five
The digits 0 - 9 and the word “Plus” are per-
s Okay
mitted.
t Please say the name.
“Plus” replaces the international dialing
code, e.g. “00”. s Smith
Say the phone number in the form of a con- t Please repeat the name.
tinuous string of digits or as blocks of dig- s Smith
its, e.g. three to five digits. 컄컄

231
Voice Control
Address Book
t Do you want to save the number in s Work “List Address Book”
a category? t Smith work. Dialing number. You can use the “List address book” com-
s No mand to listen to all names and voice tags
“Find Name”
t Name and number saved in the address book. You can select an en-
Use the “Find name” command to search try during this.
“Dial Name” for a name in the address book. Voice con- If no name is entered in the name field of
You can use the “Dial name” command to trol then asks what action you want it to the address book, the phone number or
place a call by selecting a name from your perform: for example call the selected the address is read out. A name can be en-
address book. You can choose either a number, start route guidance to the saved tered later in the name field.
voice tag or say a name entry. address or open the entry.
Example of dialog:
Only say the last name if only the last “Find Address” s List address book
name is entered in the address book.
(컄 page 228) The system reads out all address book en-
Say the last name first and then the first tries. If there is a large number of entries,
name if both are entered in the address “Delete Name ” the system asks from which entry it should
book. start the reading.
Use the “Delete name” command to delete
Example of dialog: a voice tag from your address book. i If you do not say a name, voice control reads
s Dial name out all address book entries.
Example of dialog:
t Please say the name. s Delete name To select an address book entry:
s Smith 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
t Please say the name.
on the Multi-function Steering
If there is more than one phone s Smith Wheel: Press the ! button at the
number for an entry, voice control
t Do you want to delete Smith? selected entry.
queries this.
s Yes or
t Do you want to make a work call or
a home call? t The entry has been deleted 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
or trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
Please select a line number ward you ¸

232
 Voice Control
Address Book
The entry is selected and shown on the “Find Entry” Say the letters in the form of a continuous
display. Voice control asks whether the string of letters (five to seven letters).
selected entry should be called, navi- You can use the “Find entry” command to
open any address book entry. A list of possible entries will appear in the
gated to or opened. display and you can choose the one you re-
To cancel the dialog: Example of dialog: quire.
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons s Find entry Example of dialog:
on the Multi-function Steering t Please say the name. s Spell entry
Wheel: Press the L button. s Smith t Please spell the name.
or u The system shows a numbered list s S-M-I-T-H
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- in the display.
trol: Push the Voice Control lever away u The system shows a numbered list
t Please select a line number. in the display.
from you º
s Line number 1 ... t Please select a line number.
You have cancelled the dialog. The sys-
tem confirms by responding “Cancel”. t Line number 1 accepted. s Number four
The system opens the first entry on t Number four accepted
“List Phone Book” and Dialing a Phone the list.
Number The system opens the fourth entry
If the selected entry contains at on the list.
(컄 page 220) least one phone number or an ad-
dress, voice control asks whether If the selected entry contains at
“Delete Address Book” you want to dial the number or nav- least one phone number or an ad-
igate to the stored address. dress, voice control asks whether
You can use the “Delete address book” you want to dial the number or
command to delete individual voice tags or
“Spell Entry” navigate to the stored address.
all the voice tags in the address book. The
address data is not deleted. You can use the “Spell entry” command to i You can use the “Next page” or “Previous
open any address book entry by spelling page” commands to scroll through the list. You
can use the “Correction” command to spell the
the name.
name again.

233
Voice Control
Radio and Satellite Radio
Radio and Satellite Radio The names of all received and stored sta- Commands
tions are available for voice recognition. To
You can always give the commands for the
G Warning improve voice recognition, you can store a
voice tag for a specific speaker. radio when you are listening to the radio,
Please devote your attention first and fore- even if a different application is shown on
To select the radio or satellite radio appli- the display.
most to the traffic situation you are in.
cation:
Before your journey, please familiarize your- “Help Radio”
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
self with the radio functions.
on the Multi-function Steering Using the “Help Radio” command, you can
Only use the Voice Control System when Wheel: Press the ! button on the
road and traffic conditions permit you to do
have all the commands for the radio read
multi-function steering wheel. out.
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an
accident in which you or others could be in- or
“Help Satellite Radio”
jured. 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- Using the “Help Satellite Radio” command,
ward you ¸ you can have all the commands for the sat-
Operation
ellite radio read out.
You can use voice control to: 왘 Say the command “Radio” or “Satellite
Radio”. Selecting a Waveband
앫 select the waveband
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
앫 find a station You can set the waveband with the follow-
on the Multi-function Steering
ing commands:
앫 select a frequency (FM, AM) Wheel: Press the ! button.
앫 “FM”
앫 select a category (Satellite radio) or
앫 “AM”
앫 listen to the station list 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
앫 save a voice tag for a station trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- “Next Station”/“Previous Station”
ward you ¸
앫 delete a station list (voice tags only) You can start manual tuning and set the
왘 Say one of the radio or satellite radio
앫 delete a station (voice tag only) next station using the following com-
commands explained below.
mands:
앫 select a channel number (Satellite ra-
dio) 앫 “Next station”

234
 Voice Control
Radio and Satellite Radio
앫 “Previous station” “Save Station” “Select Station”
“Next Category”/“Previous Category” Using the “Save station” command you can Using the “Select station” command, you
give a voice tag to the station currently se- can select a saved station.
You can use the following commands to lected. You can also use this command to
change the category on satellite radio: Example of dialog:
improve voice recognition for difficult
앫 “Next category” names or if you want to use a name of your s Select station
own. You could, for example, save a station t Please say the station name
앫 “Previous category”
with the name “Favorite station”.
s Favorite station
Selecting the Frequency (FM Range) When you have given the command, voice
u The system sets the station
control prompts up to three times to say
You can select frequencies within the FM
the station name. When repeating the sta- “Station Favorite Station”
range (87.9 to 107.9 MHz) directly. Voice
tion name, make sure that you pronounce
control also recognizes the words Using this command, you can select a
it in exactly the same way as you did the
“frequency”, “point” and “megahertz”. saved station.
first time. Otherwise, the name cannot be
Example of dialog: saved and voice control aborts the saving Example of dialog:
s Eighty seven point nine megahertz procedure.
s Favorite station
u The system sets the frequency. Example of dialog:
u The system sets the station
s Save station
Selecting the Frequency (AM Range) “Select Category” (Satellite Radio)
t Please say the station name
You can select frequencies within the AM Using the “Select category” command, you
s Favorite station
range (530 to 1710 kHz) directly. Voice can select an available category.
control also recognizes the words t Please repeat the station name.
“frequency” and “kilohertz”. Example of dialog:
s Favorite station
Example of dialog: s Select category
t The station has been saved.
s Five hundred and thirty kilohertz t Please say the category name
u The system sets the frequency. s News
u The system shows the category

235
Voice Control
Radio and Satellite Radio
“Category News” (Satellite Radio) 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons t Which station would you like to de-
on the Multi-function Steering lete?
Use this command to select a satellite ra- Wheel: Press the ! button.
dio category. s Favorite station
or t Do you want to delete “Favorite sta-
Example of dialog:
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- tion”?
s Category news trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- s Yes
u The system shows the category ward you ¸
t Station deleted.
“Enter Channel Number” The system sets the corresponding fre-
(Satellite radio) quency. “Delete Station List”
To cancel the dialog: You can use the “Delete station list” com-
Use the command “Enter channel number”
to select a satellite radio category. 왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons mand to delete all voice tags or individual
on the Multi-function Steering ones from your station list.
“List Station List” and Selecting a Sta- Wheel: Press the L button. Example of dialog:
tion or s Delete station list
Using the “List station list” command, you 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- t Would you like to delete all voice
can hear a list of all receivable stations and trol: Push the Voice Control lever away tags from the station list?
choose one from your station list. from you º.
s Yes
i If voice control does not recognize the sta- You have cancelled the dialog. The sys-
tion name, have it read out the list of stations. tem confirms by responding “Cancel”. t Are you sure?
This allows you to check whether you have saved s Yes
the station you require in the station list. “Delete Station”
t All voice tags have been deleted
Example of dialog: You can use the “Delete station” command from the station list
s List station list to delete a voice tag for a station from your u The system permanently deletes all
station list.
The system reads out the station list. voice tags in the station list.
Example of dialog:
If the station you require is read out: or
s Delete station
s No

236
 Voice Control
Radio and Satellite Radio
The system reads out the list of stations.
When the system reads out the stations to
be deleted:
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
on the Multi-function Steering
Wheel: Press the ! button.
or
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con-
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
ward you ¸
The station to be deleted is selected.
The system reads out the selected sta-
tion again.
t Do you want to delete “Favorite sta-
tion”?
s Yes
t Station deleted
u The system deletes the station and
reads out the remaining entries in
the station list.
or
s No
The system continues to read out the list of
stations.

237
Voice Control
DVD Changer
DVD Changer To select the CD application: Commands
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
G Warning on the Multi-function Steering “Help CD”/“Help DVD”/“Help MP3”
Wheel: Press the ! button With the commands:
Please devote your attention first and fore-
most to the traffic situation you are in. or 앫 “Help CD”
Before your journey, please familiarize your- 왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- 앫 “Help DVD audio”
self with the radio functions. trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to-
앫 “Help DVD video”
Only use the Voice Control System when ward you ¸
앫 “Help MP3”
road and traffic conditions permit you to do 왘 Say one of the following commands:
so. Otherwise you could be involved in an you can have all the commands for the CD,
앫 “CD player/CD changer”
accident in which you or others could be in- DVD or MP3 read out.
jured. 앫 “DVD audio”
앫 “DVD video” “Next CD/DVD”
Operation 앫 “MP3” With the “Next CD”/“Next DVD” com-
You can use voice control to: mands, you can select the next audio CD/
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons
DVD from your DVD changer.
앫 select a CD/DVD on the Multi-function Steering
Wheel: Press the ! button “Track 1” to “Track 99”
앫 select a track
or
앫 select a directory in MP3 operation With the “Track 1” to “Track 99” com-
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Con- mands, you can select a track number
앫 select a group in Audio DVD operation
trol: Pull the Voice Control lever to- from the inserted CD/DVD.
i On the command “Next/previous CD/ ward you ¸
DVD”, the DVD changer changes from one CD/ “Next Track”
왘 Give one of the CD or DVD commands
DVD to the next, skipping any empty compart-
ments. If you select an empty compartment with explained below. You can use the “Next track” command to
the “CD/DVD 1 to CD/DVD 6” command, the select the next track.
current compartment remains selected.

238
 Voice Control
External Equipment (AUX)
“Previous Track” “Next Group”/“Previous Group” External Equipment (AUX)
With the “Previous track” or “Repeat track” With the “Next group”/“Previous group” Audio Aux
commands, you can have the track just commands, you can select the next or pre-
played repeated. If the command is spoken vious group on the inserted audio DVD. You can use the “Audio Aux” command to
as the first few seconds of the track are activate the aux input.
played, the previous track is selected. “Next Folder”/“Previous Folder”

“Group 1” to “Group 9” With the “Next folder”/“Previous folder”

commands, you can select a folder on the
With the “Group 1” to “Group 9” com- inserted CD/DVD in MP3 mode.
mands, you can select a group on an in-
serted audio DVD. “Memory Card”
With the “Memory card” command, you
can switch to the SD card on the COMAND
system.
“DVD Video”
With the “DVD video” command, you can
start a video DVD on the COMAND system.
“Hard Disk”
With the “Hard disk” command, you can
change to the internal hard disk (Music
Register) of COMAND.

239
Voice Control
Command List
Command List 앫 Navigation 앫 Continue
In the Command list section, you will find 앫 Route guidance 앫 Go forward
all the main commands for operating voice
앫 Nav 앫 Next page
control. The commands available to you
depend on the vehicle’s equipment. 앫 DVD video 앫 Previous page
i Some functions have several voice com- 앫 DVD audio 앫 Go back
mands to facilitate operation. These are grouped 앫 Back
앫 Radio
together between the separator lines in the list
and can be used interchangeably. 앫 Satellite radio / Sirius 앫 Help radio
앫 Phone 앫 Help phone/help telephone
General Commands
앫 Messages 앫 Help address book
앫 Yes
앫 Video 앫 Help CD changer
앫 Correct
앫 Correction 앫 Help DVD
앫 Okay
앫 Wrong 앫 Help DVD changer
앫 Cancel
앫 Incorrect 앫 Help DVD audio
앫 No
앫 Help 앫 Help DVD audio changer
앫 Pause
앫 Help functions 앫 Help MP3
앫 Address book
앫 Help devices 앫 Help MP3 changer
앫 MP3
앫 Help voice control [system] 앫 Help navigation
앫 CD changer
앫 Help voice control/voice control help 앫 Help route guidance
앫 CD
앫 General help 앫 Help nav
앫 0-9
앫 Letters of the alphabet

240
 Voice Control
Command List
Phone Commands 앫 Delete
앫 Delete name
앫 Phone
앫 Delete phone number
앫 Telephone on/phone on
앫 Save
앫 Save name
앫 Save number
앫 Save phone number
앫 Dial number
앫 Dial phone number
앫 Confirm
앫 Confirm number
앫 Confirm phone number
앫 List phone book
앫 Read out phone book
앫 Redial
앫 Redial last number
앫 Redial last phone number
앫 Correction
앫 Incorrect
앫 Wrong number
앫 Wrong phone number

241
Voice Control
Command List
Navigation Commands 앫 Zoom out 앫 Spell district
앫 Navigation 앫 Zoom out of map 앫 Spell center
앫 Route guidance 앫 Zoom out completely 앫 Point(s) of interest/POI(s)
앫 Nav 앫 Zoom in completely 앫 Enter point(s) of interest/POI(s)
앫 Guidance instructions on 앫 Enter state 앫 Street
앫 Switch guidance instruction/instruc- 앫 Change state 앫 Enter street
tions on Switch route guidance in- 앫 Enter province 앫 Name of street
struction/instructions on
앫 Change state 앫 Enter name of street
앫 Listen to guidance instruction/in-
앫 Enter destination area 앫 Spell street
structions
앫 Another state 앫 Spell name of street
앫 Guidance/route guidance instruc-
tions off 앫 Last destinations 앫 Enter destination
앫 Switch off guidance/route guidance 앫 Enter town 앫 Save destination
instructions
앫 Enter name of town 앫 Save address
앫 Mute guidance/route guidance in-
앫 Spell town 앫 Start route guidance/routing/desti-
structions
앫 Spell name of town nation guidance
앫 House number
앫 Begin route guidance
앫 District
앫 Enter house number
앫 Begin destination guidance
앫 Enter district
앫 Map 앫 Continue route guidance/destination
앫 Center
앫 Show map guidance
앫 Enter center
앫 Map on/switch on map
앫 Zoom in
앫 Zoom in on map

242
 Voice Control
Command List

앫 Cancel route guidance/navigation/ Address Book Commands 앫 <voice_name_ad> home

nav/destination guidance 앫 Work
앫 Address book
앫 Exit route guidance/navigation/nav/ 앫 Office
destination guidance 앫 List address book
앫 Company/business
앫 Stop route guidance/navigation/ 앫 Read out/play address book
nav/destination guidance 앫 Car
앫 Delete address book
앫 Terminate route guidance/naviga- 앫 Car phone
앫 Spell entry
tion/nav/destination guidance 앫 Landline
앫 Spell name
앫 Next gas station 앫 Landline phone
앫 Find entry
앫 Next Mercedes-Benz Service 앫 Landline phone
앫 Delete name
앫 Next workshop 앫 Mobile
앫 List destination memory
앫 Next MB service 앫 Mobile phone
앫 Read out/play destination memory
앫 Next hospital 앫 Work car
앫 <voice_name_tu>
앫 Next car park 앫 Work car phone
앫 <voice_name_ad> car
앫 Next restaurant 앫 Car phone work/office/business/
앫 <voice_name_ad> car phone company
앫 <voice_name_ad> landline 앫 Work/office/business/company/
앫 <voice_name_ad> landline phone landline
앫 <voice_name_ad> landline phone 앫 Work/office/business/company/
landline telephone/phone
앫 <voice_name_ad> mobile
앫 Landline telephone/phone work/of-
앫 <voice_name_ad> mobile phone
fice/business/company
앫 <voice tag> mobile phone
앫 <voice tag> work

243
Voice Control
Command List
앫 Work/office/business/company/ 앫 Accept Audio and Video Commands
mobile 앫 Accept name
앫 Audio
앫 Work/office/business/company/ 앫 Accept phone number
phone Radio
앫 Okay
앫 Mobile phone work/office/business/
company 앫 Finished 앫 Radio on
앫 Home 앫 <1> - <6> 앫 87 9 megahertz - 107 9 megahertz
앫 Home car 앫 Select 1 - select 6 앫 87 point 9 to 107 point 9
앫 Home car phone 앫 Number 1 - number 6 앫 87 point 9 megahertz to 107 point 9
megahertz
앫 Car phone home
앫 Frequency 87 9 - frequency 107 9
앫 Home landline
앫 Frequency 87 point 9 - frequency 107
앫 Home landline telephone/phone point 9
앫 Landline telephone/phone home 앫 Frequency 87 point 9 megahertz - fre-
앫 Home mobile quency 107 point 9 megahertz
앫 Home mobile phone 앫 FM
앫 Mobile phone home 앫 AM
앫 Dial name 앫 Weatherband
앫 Save name 앫 Next station
앫 Save number 앫 Other station
앫 Save telephone/phone number 앫 Station search
앫 Station <voice_tag>
앫 Delete station

244
 Voice Control
Command List
앫 Save station 앫 Next category CD Changer
앫 Select station 앫 Previous category
앫 CD changer
앫 List station list 앫 Category <category name>
앫 Next CD
앫 Read out station list 앫 Select category 앫 Other CD
앫 Delete station list 앫 List category list 앫 Previous CD
앫 Previous station 앫 Read out category list 앫 Last CD
앫 Last station 앫 Previous category 앫 Next track
앫 Last category 앫 Other track
Satellite Radio (SIRIUS)
앫 Previous track
앫 Satellite Radio on/SIRIUS on
앫 Last track
앫 Next station
앫 Repeat/replay track
앫 Other channel
앫 CD 1 to CD 6
앫 Channel <voice_tag>
앫 CD number 1 - CD number 6
앫 Delete channel
앫 Track 1 - Track 99
앫 Save channel
앫 Track number 1 - Track number 99
앫 Select channel
앫 List channel list
앫 Read out channel list
앫 Delete channel list
앫 Last channel
앫 Previous station

245
Voice Control
Command List
MP3 Hard Disk DVD Audio

앫 MP3 앫 Hard disk 앫 DVD audio

앫 MP3 changer (on) 앫 Music register 앫 DVD audio changer on
앫 Next MP3 앫 Next DVD audio
Memory Card
앫 Other MP3 앫 Other DVD audio
앫 Memory card
앫 Previous MP3 앫 Previous DVD audio
앫 Last MP3 앫 Last DVD audio
앫 Repeat/replay MP3 앫 Next directory
앫 Next directory 앫 Other directory
앫 Other directory 앫 Previous directory
앫 Previous directory 앫 Last directory
앫 Last directory 앫 Next group
앫 Next track 앫 Other group
앫 Other track 앫 Previous group
앫 Previous track 앫 Last group
앫 Last track 앫 Group 1 - 9
앫 Repeat/replay track 앫 Group number 1 - 9
앫 Track 1 - Track 99 앫 Next track
앫 Track number 1 - Track number 99 앫 Other track
앫 MP3 1 - MP3 6
앫 MP3 number 1 - MP3 number 6

246
 Voice Control
Command List
앫 Previous track AUX
앫 Last track
앫 Audio aux
앫 Repeat/replay track
Video
앫 Track 1 - Track 99
앫 Track number 1 - Track number 99 앫 Video
앫 DVD audio 1 - DVD audio 6 앫 DVD video
앫 DVD audio number 1 - DVD audio
number 6

247
Voice Control
Troubleshooting
Troubleshooting

Problem Possible Cause/Consequence Suggested Solutions

Voice control does not under- You have not operated the system 왘 Only operate the system from the driver’s seat.
stand you. from the driver’s seat.
Voice control does not under- You have spoken too exaggerated- 왘 State the commands coherently and clearly without exag-
stand you. ly, too loudly or too quietly. gerating.
Voice control does not under- A blower is set to its highest set- 왘 Prevent loud noises from interfering.
stand you. ting or there is wind noise through
an open window.
Voice control does not under- System does not recognize your 왘 Individualization may improve recognition (컄 page 39).
stand you. pronounciation
An address book entry without The fields in the address book en- 왘 Say the last name and then the first name of the address
a speaker-dependent voice tag try for the last name and first name book entry in full.
is not recognized. are both filled in, but you only said
the first name or the last name.
The names entered in the address 왘 Make sure the address book entries are plausible.
book do not sound sufficiently dif- Check the address book entries for the following:
ferent, or are not pronounced as
they are written. 앫 The name entries, e.g. last name and first name, are in the
right fields.
앫 Do not use abbreviations or acronyms.
앫 Avoid unnecessary spaces in names.
앫 Do not use special characters.

248
 Voice Control
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause/Consequence Suggested Solutions
An address book entry without The names entered in the address 왘 Create a speaker-dependent voice tag (컄 page 220).
a speaker-dependent voice tag book do not sound sufficiently dif- or
is not recognized. ferent, or are not pronounced as
they are written. 왘 Give the “List address book” command.
The system reads out the address book.
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons on the Multi-func-
tion Steering Wheel: Press the ! button when the
name you want is read out.
or
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Control: Pull the Voice
Control lever toward you ¸
An address book entry with a The sound of the voice tags in the 왘 The voice tags entered in the address book must sound as
speaker-dependent voice tag is address book is not sufficiently dif- different as possible, e.g. store the names White and Wright
not recognized. ferent. as “Mr White office” and “Mr Wright John”.
or
왘 Give the “List address book” command.
The system reads out the address book.
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons on the Multi-func-
tion Steering Wheel: Press the ! button when the
name you want is read out.
or
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Control: Pull the Voice
Control lever toward you ¸

컄컄

249
Voice Control
Troubleshooting
Problem Possible Cause/Consequence Suggested Solutions
A station list entry is not recog- The voice tags for the stations in 왘 Save a speaker-dependent voice tag for the station
nized. the address book do not sound (컄 page 235).
sufficiently different. or
왘 Give the “List station list” command.
The system reads out the station list.
왘 Vehicles with Voice Control buttons on the Multi-func-
tion Steering Wheel: Press the ! button when the sta-
tion you want is read out
or
왘 Vehicles with Lever for Voice Control: Pull the Voice
Control lever toward you ¸
The station is selected (컄 page 235).
If you are making speaker-de- The two voice tags differ from each 왘 Say the voice tag with the same intonation both times.
pendent voice tags, the system other.
prompts you to enter them sev-
eral times.

250
 Voice Control
Troubleshooting
Help function “Help”
Voice control has a comprehensive help If you press the ! button (or pull the
function to assist the user. Voice Control lever toward you) and say
The voice control help function provides: the command “Help”, you will receive help
for the application currently selected.
앫 general information about how best to
operate voice control If you select the “Help” command during a
voice dialog, for example after the “Dial
앫 a list of the possible commands number” command, you will receive help
explaining how the dialog continues.
“Help voice control”
You can also request the help function for
You can use the “Help voice control” com- a specific system, for example with the
mand to obtain information about how “Help phone” command.
best to operate voice control.
If you have activated the help window, you
will see a selection of the possible com-
mands on the display (컄 page 39).

251
252
 Tele Aid
Emergency Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
Roadside Assistance . . . . . . . . .255
Information Calls . . . . . . . . . . . .255
Search & Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256

253
Tele Aid
Emergency Calls
Vehicle Equipment Emergency Calls Initiating an Emergency Call Manually
i This Operator’s manual describes all fea- Automatically 왘 Briefly press SOS button cover to open.
tures, standard or optional, potentially available
왘 Press SOS button (for longer than
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please An emergency call is initiated automatical-
be aware that your vehicle might not be
2 seconds).
ly following an accident in which the emer-
equipped with all features described in this man- gency tensioning devices (ETDs) or air The indicator lamp in the SOS button
ual. bags deploy. will flash until the emergency call is
concluded.
The Tele Aid System
왘 Wait for a voice connection to the Re-
(Tele Aid – Telematic Alarm Identification sponse Center.
on Demand)
왘 Close cover after the emergency call is
The Tele Aid system consists of three types concluded.
of response:
i During the emergency call message “Emer-
앫 automatic and manual emergency gency Call Activated” is displayed, operation
앫 Roadside Assistance from COMAND is not possible.
앫 Information For a complete description and additional
information on Emergency calls please re-
앫 Search & Send
fer to the vehicle Operator's Manual.
i Tele Aid is only available in the US.

254
 Tele Aid
Roadside Assistance
Roadside Assistance For a complete description and additional Information Calls
information on Roadside Assistance calls
Depending on model the Roadside Assis- please refer to the vehicle Operator's Man- Depending on model the Information but-
tance button • is located either in the ual. ton ¡ is located either in the center
center console or in the overhead control console or in the overhead control panel.
panel.

왘 Press and hold Information button

왘 Press and hold Roadside Assistance ¡ (for longer than 2 seconds).
Button • (for longer than A call to the Customer Assistance Cen-
2 seconds). ter will be initiated. The button will
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside As- flash while the call is in progress.
sistance dispatcher will be initiated. For a complete description and additional
The button will flash while the call is in information on Information calls please re-
progress. fer to the vehicle Operator's Manual.
왘 Describe the nature of the need for as-
sistance.

255
Tele Aid
Search & Send
Search & Send Specify and Send a Destination Retrieve Destination Address
Address
i In order to utilize Search and Send your ve- 왘 Press the Tele Aid Information button
hicle must be equipped with Tele Aid, Navigation, i Please refer to any specific instructions pro- to begin the download of the destina-
and an active Tele Aid subscription. vided by either website regarding entering or tion address to your vehicle's naviga-
“Search & Send” is a navigation destina- sending an address. Each website functions dif- tion system.
ferently and is subject to change.
tion address entry service. A destination
address located using Google Maps™ or 왘 Go to http://maps.google.com or
Yahoo Local Maps® websites can be deliv- http://maps.yahoo.com and enter a
ered via Tele Aid directly to the Navigation destination address in the address en-
system in your vehicle. try field.
왘 Depending on which website you are
using, click on the appropriate button
to send the destination address to your
Tele Aid account email address.
왘 Enter the email address you specified
when you activated your Tele Aid ac- i If you have sent more than one destination
count in the appropriate field when the address to your vehicle you must make one Infor-
“Send” dialog box appears. mation call for each destination address down-
왘 Click “Send”. load.
왘 Select Yes when the message appears
asking if you would like to start naviga-
tion. This will open the start navigation
screen (컄 page 70).

256
 Tele Aid
Search & Send
i Destination addresses will download in the
same order they were sent. If you have multiple
Mercedes-Benz vehicles equipped with Tele Aid
and active accounts, each destination address
sent will be retrievable by all vehicles associated
with the e-mail address you specified for your
Tele Aid account.

왘 Select Start.
or
왘 Select No if you wish to save the down-
loaded destination address in the
From Memory destination list for future
use.

257
258
 Technical terminology

AAC CD text DVD

(Advanced Audio Coding) CD text is an extension of an audio CD, (Digital Versatile Disc)
A means of compressing audio data which contains text information such Digital storage medium in disc format
which is subject to losses. Based on as title, artist and name of the individu- for storing large data volumes, e.g.
the MPEG2 standard. al pieces of music. ->COMAND displays films.
Bit this information on the corresponding DVD+R
(Binary digit) screens if the selected audio CD con- (DVD Recordable)
The smallest unit of digital information. tains this information. ->DVD which can be read and written
Bit rate COMAND control system but not deleted.
Measurement of transmission speed. (Cockpit Management and Data DVD+RW
Indicates the number of ->bits trans- System) (DVD Rewriteable)
mitted per unit time. Central information and operating unit ->DVD which can be read, written and
for various vehicle functions, such as deleted.
Bluetooth® radio, DVD changer and other equip-
Wireless personal area networks that ment, such as telephone, navigation DVD-R
provide a way to connect and exchange system. (DVD Recordable)
information between devices such as ->DVD which can be read and written
mobile phones, laptops, PCs, etc. over Dolby Digital but not deleted.
a short-range radio frequency. Optional format for audio data on an
DVD audio or DVD video. DVD-RW
CD (DVD Rewriteable)
(Compact Disc) DTMF ->DVD which can be read, written and
Digital storage medium in disc format. (Dual Tone Multi-Frequency) deleted.
DTMF tones control answering machi-
CD-R nes or other devices, e.g. for remote Geo-coordinates
(CD Recordable) queries. Indicate the geographical position of a
Writeable ->CD-ROM. location on the earth's surface.
DTS
CD-RW (Digital Theater Sound)
(CD Rewriteable) Optional format for audio data on an
CD which can be read, written and de- DVD audio or DVD video.
leted.

259
Technical terminology

GPS ID3 tag MPEG1 Audio Layer 3

(Global Positioning System) Additional information which may be A means of compressing audio data
System for geographic position finding. included in MP3 files (e.g. track, artist, which is subject to losses.
Satellite signals can be compared by album). Multisession
the receiver in the vehicle with a digital ISO9660 A method for recording data, e.g. for
map (e.g. on CD-ROM) and then used Standard for recording data on CDs. CDs. Data is written to the CD in a num-
for position finding and navigation. ber of sessions.
Joliet
Gracenote Media Database Standard for recording data on CDs. Music Register
Media database that is stored on Memory for the audio main function to
->COMAND’s hard drive. Kilobyte
Designation for an amount of informati- which you can copy music files in MP3
Gracenote® music recognition techno- on in digital technology. format.
logy Notebook
Music recognition software that is LOGIC7®
Multi-channel surround technology Portable personal computer (PC).
stored on ->COMAND’s hard drive. If
the selected audio CD does not contain from the professional audio industry, NTSC
any ->CD text, ->COMAND can which plays back 5.1 and stereo recor- (National Television Systems Commit-
recognise unknown audio tracks in CD dings in surround quality. LOGIC7® cre- tee)
audio mode with the aid of this ates natural 360° sound characteris- TV standard, widespread mainly in the
software and depict this in corres- tics for all seats. US.
ponding displays. MLP Folder
GSM (Meridian Lossless Packing) Alternative designation for directories.
(Global System for Mobile Optional format for audio data on a Data saved on a storage medium can
Communications) DVD-audio. be organised into directories for impro-
International transmission standard for MP3 ved clarity. Can be likened to a filing ca-
mobile phones. This permits you to The term used in everyday speech for binet containing a number of folders,
make phone calls with your mobile ->MPEG1 Audio Layer 3. each of which holds a number of docu-
phone even when abroad. The trans- ments.
mission method is digital.

260
 Technical terminology

PAL RDS UDF

(Phase Alternating Line) (Radio Data System) (Universal Disc Format)
TV standard, widespread mainly in Eu- Digital data transmission system for Standard for recording data, e.g. for
rope. FM radio stations. DVDs.
PCM Region code vCard
(Pulse Code Modulation) Because of the region code, video An address book entry may contain up
Optional format for audio data on an DVDs can only be played on DVD to 8 telephone numbers that are placed
DVD-audio or DVD-video. equipment with the same code as that in a vCard (business card). When an
The audio data are provided in com- of the ->DVD. The factory setting of the entry of this kind is stored in the mobile
pressed form, similar to ->MP3, COMAND is code 2 (컄 page 177). It phone’s telephone book, a separate
->MPEG1 Audio-Layer 3, but in contrast can only play video DVDs which also entry in the vCard is created there for
are not subject to losses. have code 2 or code 0 (no region code). every telephone number.
PDA Root directory Voice Control
(Personal Digital Assistant) The uppermost directory on a data sto- A system which can be used to operate
Small portable computer featuring rage medium. the ->COMAND or the telephone using
functions for managing dates, addres- Scan rate (->MP3) speech.
ses and appointments, for example. Indicates the frequency at which volta- WAV
PIN ge samples are taken during the con- Standard audio file format for storing
(Personal Identification Number) version of an analogue signal into a audio on PCs.
Personal identification number, to be digital signal. The analogue-to-digital WMA
entered to activate the telephone. converter converts the samples into di- (Windows® Media Audio)
Provider gital signals. A means of compressing audio data
Service provider offering access to a which is subject to losses.
mobile phone network or services
within the network.

261
262
 Index
Index
A Bit rate COMAND
AAC explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Bit rate (MP3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 character entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Address book Block Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 display settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
changing entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128 Bluetooth® . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
creating an entry. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 activating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106 opening menu for a main function . . 26
deleting entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 external authorization . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 operating example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
details for an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127 switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
initiating phone call . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 Bluetooth® interface. . . . . . . . . . . . 106 selecting menu item . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124 switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
C
opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
CD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147, 259 D
searching for entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
ejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 De-authorizing
starting route guidance. . . . . . . . . . 129
ejecting from the DVD changer . . . 152 Bluetooth® device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
voice tag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 108
Audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
loading the DVD changer . . . . . . . . 151 Declaration of conformity regarding
CD mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 the distribution of telecommunica-
DVD mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
playback options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 tions equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
MP3 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
selecting medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Destination input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Authorizing
selecting tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Destination memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
Bluetooth® device . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
CD-R. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 home address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
mobile phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106
CD-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 Dolby Digital
Aux
Character entry explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
switching to aux mode . . . . . . . . . . 173
accepting first list entry . . . . . . . . . . 28 Downloading contacts. . . . . . . . . . . 130
B cancelling an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Driving maneuver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Bit deleting an entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 DTMF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 entering characters. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 DTS
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259

263
Index

DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 DVD video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 G

audio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 fast forward/reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . 180 GPS
ejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
ejecting from the DVD changer. . . . 152 mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179 reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 pause function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Gracenote Media Database . . . . . . . 160
loading the DVD changer . . . . . . . . 151 picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181 Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 selecting a film/track . . . . . . . . . . . 181 switching read function on/off . . . . 161
playback options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 selecting a scene/chapter . . . . . . . 181 GSM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105
selecting medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 selecting medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
selecting tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Setting audio format . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
setting audio format . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 setting language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183 H
video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 HD Radio
DVD audio video game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184 display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
fast forward/reverse. . . . . . . . . . . . 159 DVD+R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 program info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 DVD+RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
pause function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 DVD-R . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 submenu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
stop function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 DVD-RW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259 switching to. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
switching to weatherband . . . . . . . . 140
E switching wavebands . . . . . . . . . . . 140
Emergency calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 tuning to a station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140
automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Highway information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
F I
Folder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 ID3 tag
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Information calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
ISO9660
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

264
 Index

J Media Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Music Register . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163, 260

Joliet connecting devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 copying music files . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 connection options . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 playback options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
playback options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
K selecting active partition. . . . . . . . . 172 N
Kilobyte. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 selecting category/playlist/folder . 170 Navigation
selecting music files . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 basic settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
L supported devices. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 block Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
List entry supported formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 destination input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
selecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 switching to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 detour function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90
LOGIC7 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Menu COMAND displaying/hiding menu system . . . . 53
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 video . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 driving maneuver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
MLP menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
M navigation announcements . . . . . . . . 89
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Making calls off map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MPEG1 Audio Layer 3 . . . . . . . . . . . 260
COMAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
MP3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Map POI input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
information on map . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59 route guidance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
map display. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 traffic lane recommendation. . . . . . . 86
mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
setting map scale . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53 Navigation announcements . . . . . . . 89
playback options. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
selecting folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 switching off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
selecting medium . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Notebook . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
selecting tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 NTSC
Multifunction steering wheel . . . . . . 21 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Multisession
O
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Off map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
Off-road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

265
Index

P RDS picture settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

PAL explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 playback options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Rear Seat Entertainment remote control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Passcode active source from COMAND . . . . . 210 replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
entering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107 aux operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 selecting a film/track . . . . . . . . . . . 206
PCM back to movie . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 selecting a scene/chapter . . . . . . . 206
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 basic functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 selecting folders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Personal Identification Number CD/DVD Audio and MP3 . . . . . . . . 199 selecting the display . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
see PIN CD/DVD drive. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192 selecting tracks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Phone connecting additional headsets . . . 194 setting audio format . . . . . . . 203, 208
accepting/ending a call (COMAND) 121 control menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 setting language . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
entering a phone number . . . . . . . . 121 display screens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190 setting treble and bass . . . . . . . . . . 196
redial (COMAND). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 DVD menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 stop function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
single call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 DVD video operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 subtitles and camera angle . . . . . . . 208
PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 ejecting a CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 switching the display on/off . . . . . . 191
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 fast forward/reverse. . . . . . . 201, 205 switching to CD/DVD or MP3 . . . . . 200
POI category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 functional restrictions . . . . . . 197, 204 system parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Provider general information. . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 system settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 headset operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 video game . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
interactive content . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 wireless headset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 193
R loading a CD/DVD . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Region code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Radio main loudspeaker operation . . . . . . 196 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
menu overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 menu system. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205 Remote control
storing stations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136 multiuser operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
switching wavebands . . . . . . . . . . . 135 muting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
tuning to a station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 notes on CD/DVD discs . . . . . . . . . 199 Route guidance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
tuning to a station (COMAND) . . . . 135 pause function . . . . . . . . . . . 202, 205 Route mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 56

266
 Index

S System settings Voice Control

SatRadio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 address book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
automatic tuning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 address book comands. . . . . . . . . . 243
T adjusting the volume. . . . . . . . . . . . 216
operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
Tele Aid audio and video comands . . . . . . . . 244
program category . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
roadside assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 aux comands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
service information . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Time canceling the dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
service provider . . . . . . . . . . . 142, 146
setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 comand list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
station list updates . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Traffic lane recommendation . . . . . . 86 comand types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
storing channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Traffic notifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 display messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
subscribing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
in the map. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92 DVD audio comands . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Scan rate
list of messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94 DVD changer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
SD card entering numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
U
ejecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
UDF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 general comands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261
Search and Send . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 hard disk comands . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Updating
retrieve a destination . . . . . . . . . . . 256 help function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
Gracenote® music recognition techno-
send a destination . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 interrupting the dialog. . . . . . . . . . . 216
logy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Selecting memory card comands . . . . . . . . . . 246
map software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
satellite radio channel. . . . . . . . . . . 146 MP3 comands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246
Sound V navigation comands . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 vCard navigation operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
surround sound. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 operating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Stopover destination Video overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
entering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 DVD mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 phone comands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241
Switching on phone operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
satellite radio operation . . . . . . . . . 143 radio and satellite radio . . . . . . . . . 234

267
Index

satradio comands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245

spell . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
starting the dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
troubleshooting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248
video comands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Voice control
settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Volume
setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
setting for navigation announcements .
31
setting for telephone calls . . . . . . . . 31

W
Wireless headset
replacing batteries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
setting the volume . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
switching on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 194
WMA
explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

268
We reserve the right to modify
the technical details
of the COMAND system as given
in the data and illustrations
of this Operator’s Manual.
Press time: 04/15/2008
Reprinting, translation and copying,
even of excerpts, is not permitted
without prior authorization in writing.
 Sommer\ Corporate\ Media\ AG

Bild in der Größe

215x100 mm einfügen
Stern und MB-Schrift nur optional verwenden

COMAND

COMAND Operator’s Manual

Operator’s Manual
Order-No. 6515 6827 13 Part-No. 164 584 09 87 US Edition B 2009